Home

Nikon D7000 User's Manual

1. WB o button White balance IS0 9 button ISO sensitivity ceea Image quality size 13 BE Scene Mode Choose a scene SCENE M 41 ei a did nee z all 2 yy ad IE ue ISON SRA sR eA OF PT amp amp om Monitor EE image Quality and Size Set image quality M 86 G2 i Choose an image size I 88 QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel BE Autofocus Choose an autofocus mode CQ 92 Choose an AF area mode m 95 Control panel EE SO Sensitivity Set ISO sensitivity 21 101 IS0 button Main command dial Control panel 14 EE Exposure Choose a combination of aperture and shutter speed mode P A 68 Choose a shutter speed mode S or M C69 71 Choose an aperture mode A or M 70 71 Choose a metering option mode P S A or M 1 105 Set exposure compensation mode P S A or M 107 Activate or cancel bracketing select number of shots in bracketing sequence mode P S A or M Q 109 112 114 Mode P E Main command dial gt button Main command dial Main command dial es 4 button BKT T Main command dial LZZ Con panel Control panel Control panel Co
2. 218 HDMI CEC ceessssscessesecesenstnesessee 194 Cross screen Filter effects 254 Filter Off CCtS emer 134 254 Help 18 CUSTOM Settings scssscssssessssseeessees 206 Fine tune optimal exposure 213 Hi Sensitivity ssesseeesssssssssssseesees 102 Customize command dials 233 Fine tuning white balance 119 Hide image n 196 Cyanotype Monochrome ae 253 Firmware VETS ON ee 247 High definition 1 93 318 D Fisheye VEIO E IENEI IE TAE 261 High ISO NR ooecccccccccccccccccccccecececceeeee 205 _ _ Fash 39 143 144 148 149 275 Highlights ssasasssussessesuens 166 197 Date and time cssssscssueseee 27 237 Flash White balance 117 Histogram ss 166 167 197 Date format ccsssssssssesssssssssssees 27 237 Flash bracketing 109 228 Daylight saving time 27 237 Flash cntrl for built in flash 223 Be DCF Version 2 0 eesssssssssseeen 142 318 Flash compensation 148 mage coMMent 238 Default settings 1 51 202 207 295 Flash MOde ee eeeceeeeeeee pusturi 144 Image Dust Off ref photo ae 240 Delayed remote Remote control Flash only Auto bracketing set Image OVETAY esssessseessessseeesseeees 256 BOI E ES 80 109 229 Image QUAIItY esessscscsssseseeneens 85 DIAA 47 175 Flash anges sees A 147 IMAGE revieW uu esessesseseeseesees 163 200 Delete all iMaQeS csssssssssssssseeeeee 176 Flash ready indicator 39 149 279 Image
3. View other Rotate main command dial to view same location in other images images at current zoom ratio hange protect cpangep Yom See page 174 for more information status Return to gt Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken immediately shooting mode Z Display menus MENU See page 195 for more information 173 Protecting Photographs from Deletion In full frame Zoom thumbnail and calendar playback the button can be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion Protected files can not be deleted using the tf button or the Delete option in the playback menu Note that protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted M 32 To protect a photograph 1 Select an image Display the image in full frame playback or playback zoom or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback a Gam 1 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG 15 04 2010 10 02 27 Full frame playback 2 Press the Y button The photograph will be marked with a amp icon To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted display the photograph or highlight it in the a eS a i o 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 thumbnail list and then press the on Jon button button Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback folder menu press the a
4. 4 5 ____ g Da Da PUE a Da p Ee oe bOd XO A F A Tuini matla E A kK mm BKT 0 a hiihii A Baa F AUTO Framing grid displayed when On is selected for 15 Flash ready indicator sssssssssesssssssesesssssseeee 39 219 Custom Setting d2 ssssssssssssssssssssesesesssssssssseees 216 FV lock indicator ee ee 149 k FOCUS POINTS esssscsssssssssssesssccscccsssssseeseessseseessssnees 38 96 EVA Flash sync indicator sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssen 222 AF area MOE cscssessssesesesssscssssssessssesesesssecsseseseeees 94 18 Aperture stop INGICAtOFL O 70 270 JEJ AF area brackets ss ssssissssssssnistsrssoicsnisesecsesrsea 37 165 Exposure INCICAtOF cssssssssssssssssssesesssccscceecessseeseesee 72 Battery indicator ssescsssssessssesssssseccssseesssseees 35 216 Exposure compensation display ccceeee 107 5 Black and white indicator sssssesesssseresesesesss 216 TIE CAO enaa 231 6 No memory card indicator 30 216 20 Flash compensation indicator cesecseceeeees 148 Focus indicator esecsesesseseesesseseeeeseesees 38 97 100 21 Exposure compensation indicatol 00 107 BE Autoexposure AE 1OCK sssssssesssesnseesneenssen 106 XJ Auto ISO sensitivity indicator n ssesssessseeen 104 Shutter speed s sssessssessssesssseesssesossesssseesssersss 69 71 Number of exposures remaining ss ssssssssssseesss 36 AR
5. 2 Grid Adjust 133 EE Picture Control Settings Option Description Choose from options between 2 and 2 to reduce or exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control note that this resets all manual adjustments For example choosing positive values for Vivid makes pictures more vivid Not available with Neutral or Monochrome Picture Controls Control the sharpness of outlines Select A to adjust sharpening Sharpening ee according to the type of scene or choose from values between no sharpening and 9 the higher the value the greater the sharpening shee A to adjust contrast automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 choose lower values to prevent highlights in portrait subjects from being washed out in direct sunlight Quick adjust higher values to preserve detail in misty landscapes and other low contrast subjects Choose 1 for reduced brightness 1 for enhanced brightness Does not Brightness sjo1 U0 34N D1q IlL sjuawjsn pe ball Ee affect exposure Control the vividness of colors Select A to adjust saturation automatically according to the type of scene or choose from values between 3 and 3 lower values reduce saturation and higher values increase it Choose negative values to a minimum of 3 to make reds more purple blues more green and greens more yellow positive values up to 3 to make reds more orange greens more blue and bl
6. EE Commander Mode Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to two groups A and B using advanced wireless lighting Selecting this option displays the menu shown at right Press lt q BERIT or gt to highlight the following options A or W to change polls P Mode Comp Y Built in flash TIL E 0 ca Group A TIL E O T Group B TIL im O Channel CH Move Set WOK Option Description ae Choose a flash mode for the built in flash commander flash TTL i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV M__ Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The built in flash does not fire although remote flash units do The built in flash must be raised so that it can emit monitor pre flashes GroupA Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A i TTL mode Choose flash compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Auto aperture available only with SB 900 and SB 800 flash units Choose flash M compensation from values between 3 0 and 3 0 EV in increments of 1 3 EV Choose the flash level from values between 1 1 and 1 128 1 128 of full power The flash units in this group do not fire Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B The options available are the same as those listed for Group A above
7. 225 Ethernet sssssssssssssssssersserssens 181 280 Front curtain SynCussssssessesn 145 Compatible lens w ccsssssessssssseees 269 EV steps for exposure cntrl 211 Full frame playback 163 Compressed Type wesssssssssssssseees 87 EXIF version 2 3 susse A E TATT capctornsicgercanuitiiecen dink 149 COMPUtEF ssssssssssessresssrsssrrsssrresseesse 179 EXPOSUTC ssreernrernreernee 67 106 107 G Connoctontorextenal Exposure bracketing 109 229 MICrOPhONE sssssesssssesissresrrssrsrrssresresn 3 Exposure compensation 107 OPi enman 162 281 Continuous high speed 7 77 78 Exposure delay mode 219 GPS nsss 162 169 Continuous low speed 7 77 78 Exposure INdICATOT sssss ss11 1 1 11 72 GPS data onssa 169 217 Exposure LOCK sussssssssssssssssvsserrennre ae eseon 119 255 Continuous release mode 7 77 78 EXPOSUrE METETS sereeesreeeen 39 214 Green intensifier Filter effects Continuous servo AF 91 208 Exposure prograM s es 298 254 Control panel sssssssssssssssrsssrsssrssersssn g External microphone 27 60 H Copy image s NOE TOEEEE TEE E 197 Eye Fi upload BOSCO oo oo ao 247 a _ Copyright eecsesecsssseeceeeees 169 243 F 267 EEA 313 Copyright information 243 AD Metter tee 193 318 CPU JENS n 26 269 File NAMING ssesecseceeseessessscsssecees 204 HDMI mini pin connector 3 193 Creative Lighting System 276 File number sequence
8. Choose from channels 1 4 All flash units in both groups must be set to the same channel Group B Channel 225 226 Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode 1 Adjust settings for the built in flash Choose the flash control mode and output level for the built in flash Note that output level can not be adjusted in mode Adjust settings for group A Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group A Adjust settings for group B Choose the flash control mode and output level for the flash units in group B Select the channel Press 6 gt Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode A T CA Liv gt Mode Comp Built in flash 7 Group A TIL E 0 Group B TIL E 0 Channel CH Move Set ONOK Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode CA ir gt rA T tA fr gt Mode Comp Built in flash TTL a Group A TTL E 0 7E Group B i Channel CH Move Set OKOK Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode Mode Comp Built in flash TTL Group TTL 0 7 Group B M fim 1 4 Channel CH Move Set OKOK Flash cntrl for built in flash Commander mode T CA ir Mode Comp Built in flash TTL Group A TTL 0 7 Group B M 1 4 Channel gt CH Move Set OKOK 6 Compose the shot Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flas
9. Settings saved using this model of camera can be restored by selecting Load settings Note that Save load settings is only available when a memory card is inserted in the camera and that the Load settings option is only available if the card contains saved settings Saved Settings Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP7 The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed 244 Virtual Horizon MENU button gt Y Setup menu Display a virtual horizon based on information from the camera EEmmmmI tilt sensor The reference line is displayed in green when the camera is level M Tilting the Camera The virtual horizon display is not accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back If the camera is unable to measure Reference line tilt the amount of tilt will not be displayed Viewfinder Virtual Horizon If Viewfinder virtual horizon is assigned to the Fn or depth of field preview button using Custom Setting f3 Assign Fn button or f4 Assign preview button a tilt meter can be displayed in the viewfinder by pressing the selected button M 231 See Also A virtual horizon can also be displayed during live view M 53 245 AF Fine Tune MENU button gt Setup menu Fine tune focus for up to 12 lens types AF tuning is not recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal focus use only when required Option Description AF finetune e On Turn AF
10. as Reg Ao E Lens accessory rangefinder modes P S Al Al modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E tte wt Zi Medical NIKKOR 120mm f 4 aw Iv ia Reflex NKKOR Cd E PC NIKKOR v dd A type Teleconverter ee PB 6 Bellows Focusing Attachment Teese Oo Eeeeames 7 Os I Y Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 PN 11 1 Range of rotation for Al 80 200mm f 2 8 ED 8 Exposure determined by presetting lens tripod mount is limited by camera body Filters aperture In mode A preset aperture using lens can not be exchanged while Al 200 400mm f 4 aperture ring before performing AE lock and ED is mounted on camera shifting lens In mode M preset aperture using 2 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster lens aperture ring and determine exposure 3 If maximum aperture is specified using Non before shifting lens CPU lens data M 159 aperture value will be 9 Exposure compensation required when used displayed in viewfinder and control panel with Al 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 Al 35 105mm f 3 5 4 Can be used only if lens focal length and 4 5 Al 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm maximum aperture are specified using Non f 2 8D See teleconverter manual for details CPU lens data 159 Use spot or center 10 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or weighted metering if desired results are not faster achieved 11 Requires PK 12 or PK 13 auto extension ring 5 Forimproved precision specify lens focal length PB 6D may be required depending on
11. auto area AF is chosen for AF area mode M 94 or an option other than is chosen and the center focus point is selected The AF assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus operation The camera om may not be able to focus using autofocus when lighting is poor The AF Assist Illuminator The AF assist illuminator has a range of about 0 5 3 0 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in when using the illuminator use a lens with a focal length of 24 200 mm and remove the lens hood See Also For information on the shooting modes in which AF assist is available see page 292 See page 273 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist 210 a8 Live View Movie AF MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how the camera focuses when autofocus is selected in live view or during movie recording e Autofocus mode Select the focus mode used for autofocus in G28 Live view movie AF live view and movie recording 1 50 Choose from Single eee rA servo AF and Full time servo AF Msinoeseno AF 0 AF F Full time servo AF 2 e AF areamode Choose how the focus point for autofocus is GS 28 Live view movie AF selected during live view and movie recording 2 50 _ Choose from Face priority AF Wide area AF Normal area t AF and Subject tracking AF fe Sad Normalarea AF Subject tracking AF b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select th
12. e Do not use with travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one voltage to another or with DC to AC inverters Failure to observe this precaution could damage the product or cause overheating or fire Use appropriate cables When connecting cables to the input and output jacks use only the cables provided or sold by Nikon for the purpose to maintain compliance with product regulations N CD ROMs CD ROMs containing software or manuals should not be played back on audio CD equipment Playing CD ROMs on an audio CD player could cause hearing loss or damage the equipment xiii XIV Notices e No part of the manuals included with this e Nikon will not be held liable for any product may be reproduced transmitted damages resulting from the use of this transcribed stored in a retrieval system or product translated into any language in any form by While every effort has been made to ensure any means without Nikon s prior written that the information in these manuals is permission accurate and complete we would e Nikon reserves the right to change the appreciate it were you to bring any errors or specifications of the hardware and software omissions to the attention of the Nikon described in these manuals at any time and representative in your area address without prior notice provided separately Notices for Customers in Canada CAUTION ATTENTION This Class B digital apparatus complies with Cet appare
13. 200mm f 2 8G IF ED e e AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II e Ai AF Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D ED e AF S Zoom Nikkor 80 200mm f 2 8D IF ED Ai AF VR Zoom Nikkor 80 400mm f 4 5 5 6D ED AF S VR Nikkor 200mm f 2G IF ED AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 200 400mm f 4G IF ED AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED VR II At ranges under 1 m 3 ft 3 in the following lenses may block the AF assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35mm f 2 8D IF ED AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55mm f 2 8G IF ED AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR Il AF S NIKKOR 24 70mm f 2 8G ED Ai AF Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm F3 5 5 6D IF AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED AF S Zoom Nikkor 28 70mm f 2 8D IF ED AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR AF Zoom Micro Nikkor 70 180mm f 4 5 5 6D ED Ai AF Micro Nikkor 200mm f 4D IF ED 273 274 Calculating Angle of View The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 x 24 mm The size of the area exposed by the D7000 in contrast is 23 6 x 15 6 mm meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1 5 times that of the D7000 The approximate focal length of lenses for the D7000 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal length of the lens by about 1 5 Picture size 35mm format 36 x 24mm Picture diagonal Picture size D7000 23 6 x 15 6 mm Angle of
14. 244 Scene MOE nssesessssessssessssserssseessssees 40 SEreEn LIDS oiii 216 SD memory card 29 32 89 319 320 Select date 177 185 196 Self timMer eesessesseeeeeees 7 77 80 214 Sensitivity wut wesiesutnenc 101 103 Sepia Monochrome 253 Set Picture Control 131 Setup MENU ssessesssesssessesseesseessessess 236 Shade White balance 117 Shooting data cecessseeeeeeeees 168 Shooting MEenU s ssssssssssesssserrssseee 202 Shutter priority AUTO 69 Shutter release button 38 39 97 106 213 Shutter release button AE L 213 Side by side comparison 264 Single FLAME ecesssesessecscseeseees 7 77 Single point AF ssssssssseessseeess 94 95 Single servo AF sssssessssessse 91 208 4 oe nae rere ere ne oe 88 Size priority JPEG compression 87 Skylight Filter effects 254 Slide SHOW cssessscssessssessesssseeseeees 201 SIQU ieee aenarioes 30 89 164 Slot empty release lock 234 SHOW SYNC nssensssesssseeessseessssseessseeessseee 145 Small Image SIZE cssesseseseseeeees 88 Soft Filter effects sess 254 SPEAK EN sisciatciaucnestAinainanian 4 5 Speedlight cesessessssecseseeseeeeeees 275 SRGB isisisi 141 Standard Set Picture Control 131 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR 146 Start printing PictBridge 185 187 Storage FOIAES esesessesseesesseesees 203 Straighten ai aiuctus
15. DIGITAL CAMERA D7000 User s Manual Where to Find It Find what you re looking for from The Table of Contents M iv xi Find items by function or menu name fy The Q amp A Index CO ii iii Know what you want to do but don t know the function name Find it from the question and answer index The Index M 322 325 Search by key word Error Messages m 305 308 If the camera displays a warning find the solution here Troubleshooting mM 299 304 Camera behaving unexpectedly Find the solution here A For Your Safet Before using the camera for the first time read the safety instructions in For Your Safety CO xii xvii Help Use the camera s on board help feature for help on menu items and other topics See page 18 for details Digitutor Digitutor a series of watch and learn manuals in movie form is available from the following website http www nikondigitutor com index_eng html Q amp A Index Table of Contents Introduction Basic Photography and Playback Live View Ed Recording and Viewing Movies H P S A and M Modes Pa User Settings U1 and U2 Modes Release Mode cz Image Recording Options Focus ISO ISO Sensitivity Exposure Bracketing WB White Balance Image Enhancement Flash Photography Other Shooting Options B More on Playback Connections Menu Guide Technical Notes D7000 CEN Ll 49 CL 57 Ll 67 CL 75 LO 77
16. Manual Cleanihig esesman nar N OETA Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions sss essseesssessssessseessseessseeosseesssesssseosss Avaa pIe eN a E E EE E E A DE N an E EA A E E Exposure Program Mode P sssssssssssscssscssesssssssscscsesssssesseseseseseseesescsescsesseesesesesceees TOUDE ROON aen E T N BE NAY E EE E E EE E E E E E E A SMOOTING AI MOQES sccscccucestssneceasssaeevastnnevanereow aqartaeenst asain nett wenn eeaeian asians SNOOTING PS A Messer PO O a E teats IVS CENA COUS srxacscuccsassensdonvsassasevacoxsentalvenvarsaestentsauiacenuetmonsten RAE R BOF Messages israr ae EEEE NEAS one ness SPECE AOS arseenia NAE NEEN O OOE SEAE xi xii For Your Safety To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equipment Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product will read them The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol uN This icon marks warnings To prevent possible injury read all warnings before using this Nikon product EE WARNINGS ZN Keep the sun out of the frame Z Do not disassemble Keep the sun well out of the frame when Touching the product s internal parts shooting backlit subjects Sunlight could result in injury In the event of focused into the camera when the sun
17. Monitor off delay Playback x A ov Zi il 20 Information display 10s 215 mage review Live view 10 min c5 Remote on duration 1min 215 Option Default M d1 ve Voume OF T T d3 Show frame count 216 i Vewinderwaringdsplay 0n 176 a d5 Screen tips 216 d6 CL mode shooting speed 3 fps 217 d7 Max continuous release 100 217 d8 File number sequence 218 d9 Information display Auto 219 10 LCD illumination 219 d11 Exposure delay mode Off 219 d12 Flash warning 219 d13 MB D11 battery type LR6 AA alkaline 220 Use MB D11 d14 Battery order 221 e1 Flash sync speed 1 250 s 222 e2 Flash shutter speed 1 60 s 223 e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash Optional flash aes e4 Modeling flash 228 e5 Auto bracketing set AE amp flash 229 e6 Bracketing order ele wee 229 over f1 8 switch LCD backlight 8 229 f2 OK button shooting mode ie 229 f3 FV lock 230 f4 Assign preview button Preview 232 i AE AFlock 232 f6 Customize command dials Reveserotaton Wo Gaomeman ON Mensasta OF f7 Release button to use dial 234 f8 Slot empty release lock Enable release 234 f9 Reverse indicators Faiiriitiriis 234 FIO Assign MB D11 amp button AE AFlock 235 Default settings restored with Reset custom settings M 207 296 EE Setup Menu Defaults Option Defaut E Option Defaut E Save user settings Time zone and date Shooting mode 7
18. Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex electronic circuitry Only Nikon brand electronic accessories including chargers batteries AC adapters and flash accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating igniting rupturing or leaking For more information about Nikon brand accessories contact a local authorized Nikon dealer AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO i ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD AVC VIDEO AND OR ii DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA L L C SEE http www mpegla com Before Taking Important Pictures Before taking pictures on important occasions such as at weddings
19. f10 Assign MB D11 amp Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the function assigned to the AE L AF L button on the optional MB D11 battery pack Eh ab ap AF ON Option AE AF lock AE lock only AF lock only AE lock Hold AF ON FV lock Same as Fn button Description Focus and exposure lock while the MB D11 AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks while the MB D11 AE L AF L button is pressed Focus locks while the MB D11 AE L AF L button is pressed Exposure locks when the MB D11 AE L AF L button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off Pressing the MB D11 AE L AF L button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Press the MB D11 AE L AF L button to lock flash value built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only M 149 Press again to cancel FV lock The MB D11 AE L AF L button performs the function selected for Custom Setting f3 M 230 VR Lenses Vibration reduction can not be initiated by pressing the AE L AF L button 235 T The Setup Menu Camera Setup To display the setup menu press MENU and select the setup menu tab MENU button a SETUP MENU a SETUP MENU e Format memory card A y Save user settings se Save user settings lt EA Reset user settings Reset user settings ae gt ZAD brightness A LCD brightness
20. A 85 nd ond AS a RAR 179 als NJ f O Q amp A Index _ Find what you re looking for using this question and answer index Taking Photographs Q Shooting Modes and Framing Options Is there a quick and easy way to take snapshots mode How do quickly adjust settings for different scenes Can choose a shutter speed mode Can choose an aperture mode A How do I make long time exposures mode M Can frame photos in the monitor Can shoot movies Q Release Modes Can I take photos one at a time or in quick succession How do I take pictures with the self timer or a remote control Can I reduce shutter noise in quiet surroundings Focus Can I choose how the camera focuses Can I choose the focus point Q Image Quality and Size How do take pictures for printing at large sizes How can I get more pictures on the memory card Exposure Can make photos brighter or darker How do preserve details in shadows and highlights Using the Flash Can I set the flash to fire automatically when needed How do I keep the flash from firing How do avoid red eye Viewing Photographs Q Playback How do I view photographs on the camera How do I view more information about a photo Can I view photos in an automatic slide show Can I view photos on a TV Can I protect photos from accidental deletion Deletion How do I delete unwanted photos 35 39 40
21. AF lock i AF only Focus locks while the AE L AF L button is pressed AE lock Exposure locks when the AE L AF L button is pressed and KERS remains locked until the button is pressed a second time mere or the exposure meters turn off AE ON The AE L AF L button initiates autofocus The shutter release button can not be used to focus Press the AE L AF L button to lock flash value built in FV lock flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only Q 149 Press again to cancel FV lock 232 f6 Customize Command Dials MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls the operation of the main and sub command dials e Reverse rotation Controls the direction of the command dials Choose No for normal command dial operation Yes to reverse the rotation of the command dials This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D11 e Change main sub If Off is selected the main command dial controls shutter speed and the sub command dial controls aperture Select On Mode A to use the main command dial to select aperture in shooting mode A On to use the main command dial to select aperture in modes A and M and the sub command dial to select shutter speed in modes S and M This setting also applies to the command dials for the MB D11 e Aperture setting If Sub command dial is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is sele
22. Before connecting the camera install the software on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera EN EL15 battery is fully charged If in doubt charge the battery before use or use an EH 5a AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately EE Supplied Software ViewNxX 2 includes a Nikon Transfer 2 function for copying pictures from the camera to the computer where ViewNX 2 can be used to view and print selected images or to edit photographs and movies For more information see ViewNX 2 online help EE Supported Operating Systems The supplied software can be used with computers running the following operating systems e Windows Windows 7 Home Basic Home Premium Professional Enterprise Ultimate Windows Vista Service Pack 2 Home Basic Home Premium Business Enterprise Ultimate and Windows XP Service Pack 3 Home Edition Professional ViewNX 2 runs as 32 bit applications in 64 bit editions of Windows 7 and Windows Vista e Macintosh Mac OS X version 10 4 11 10 5 8 10 6 4 See the websites listed on page xvii for the latest information on supported operating systems Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Close the camera connector cover when the connector is not in use V During Transfer Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB
23. D40 series 1 0m 3ft 3in No vignetting at any focus distance Because the built in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover the angle of view of a lens with a focal of 20 mm or more vignetting will occur at a focal length of 18 mm Lens Care e Keep the CPU contacts clean e Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces To remove smudges and fingerprints apply a small amount of ethanol or lens cleaner to a soft clean cotton cloth or lens cleaning tissue and clean from the center outwards using a circular motion taking care not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers e Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean the lens e The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens element e Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible pouch e When a lens hood is attached do not pick up or hold the lens or camera using only the hood e Ifthe lens will not be used for an extended period store it in a cool dry location to prevent mold and rust Do not store in direct sunlight or with naphtha or camphor moth balls e Keep the lens dry Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage e Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp parts made from reinforced plastic 316 Supplied Accessories e 67 mm Snap on Front Lens Cap LC 67 e Rear Lens Cap e Flexible Lens Pouch CL 1018 e Bayonet Hood HB 32
24. Only one value can be stored for each type of lens If a teleconverter is used separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and teleconverter 246 Eye Fi Upload MENU button gt Y Setup menu This option is displayed only when an Eye Fi memory card available separately from third party suppliers is inserted in the camera Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected destination Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal strength is insufficient Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose Disable where wireless devices are prohibited When an Eye Fi card is inserted its status is indicated by an icon in the information display Eye Fi upload disabled Eye Fi upload enabled but no pictures available for upload static Eye Fi upload enabled waiting to begin upload a animated Eye Fi upload enabled uploading data e Error camera can not control Eye Fi card If a blinking r appears in the control panel or viewfinder refer to page 307 if this indicator is not displayed pictures can be taken normally but you may be unable to change Eye Fi settings e e o V Eye Fi Cards Eye Fi cards may emit wireless signals when Disable is selected If a warning is displayed in the monitor M 307 turn the camera off and remove the card See the manual provided with the Eye Fi card and direct any inquiries to the manufacturer The camera can be used to
25. attaches as shown at right Optional Accessories e 67 mm screw on filters e Rear Lens Cap LF 1 or Rear Lens Cap LF 4 A Note on Wide Angle Lenses Autofocus may not provide the desired results with wide and super wide angle lenses in the following situations 1 The subject does not fill the focus point If the subject does not fill the focus point the camera may focus on the background and the subject may be till out of focus eee eal sania yy Iiii Example A far off portrait subject at some distance from the background 2 The subject contains many fine details The camera may have difficulty focusing on subjects that contain many fine details or that are lacking in contrast f fl O Wen In these cases use Manual focus or use focus lock to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph For more information see Getting Good Results with Autofocus M 93 317 EE Supported Standards e DCF Version 2 0 The Design Rule for Camera File Systems DCF is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility among different makes of camera e DPOF Digital Print Order Format DPOF is an industry wide standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory card e Exif version 2 3 The D7000 supports Exif Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras version 2 3 a standard in wh
26. flashing F will also appear in the control panel and viewfinder The displays will flash for about six seconds Measure white balance Before the indicators stop flashing frame the reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and press the shutter release button all the way down The camera will measure a value for white balance and store itin preset d 0 No photograph will be recorded white balance can be measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus 5 Check the results If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance Saad will flash in the control panel for about six seconds while the viewfinder will show a flashing UD r A me Control panel I ae Viewfinder If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing an id will appear in the control panel and viewfinder for about six seconds Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again Viewfinder 6 Select preset d 0 If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately select preset d 0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial until d 0 is displayed in the control panel Direct Measurement Mode If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay N 214 Preset d 0 The new
27. oO ana P R a arr Feimeleiss e 5 lt a gt 27 PHHH o l 56 A ae nanan mre 7s te AF ASC bf WE a KEJ Beep indicator siisii 18 Exposure compensation indicator E BED Flash sync indicator scississomssiseoneanitrennnigs 222 EJ Flash compensation indicator sseceeeeeees 148 Auto area AF indicator ccccssssssessssssscsessseeseees 95 AF area mode indicator sssseesssssessssseressssessssssee 95 3D tracking indicator sess ssssseeessssesssssoeessssseessssee 94 22 AUTOFOCUS MOCE c ceccssessecssecssessecssesssecsssssecssessseessee 91 JEJ MB D11 battery indicator 221 Battery indicator sssssssscsssssesssssssssecsssssseessssssseeees 35 Di SE Ne esses ccacccpceaiseteattntbteoteceter deca 144 PD NAS E E sass 88 Image quality eescccssssesscsssssseesccssssseccsesssseeessessssseses 85 White balance fine tuning indicator 120 EE W nite balaie essesi 117 10 Aperture stop indicator sssssssssssseessssseesss 70 270 Aperture f number ssssseesssssessssserssssesessssee 70 71 Aperture number Of StOpS ssssesseeseeees 70 270 Bracketing inNCreMent cccsecseseeseeseeesees 110 112 Number of shots per interval ccessseeseeeees 156 Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 159 PC mode indicator ssssecsscsscsscsssssessesscnensees 181 GE Flexible program indicator usesssesssesseesseenee 68 KEJ Memory card indicato
28. the camera shutter release button will lock and no photographs can be taken Flash unit SB 80DX SB 28DX SB 28 SB 30 SB 272 SB 22S SB 23 SB 293 A Novato MO A M Manual v Repeatingfigsh A a a REAR Rear curtain sync 7 1 Select mode P S A or M lower built in flash and use optional flash unit only 2 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter release is disabled Set flash unit to A non TTL auto flash 3 Autofocus is available with AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED and AF S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f 2 8G ED lenses only 4 Available when camera is used to select flash mode Flash Control Mode The information display shows the flash control mode for optional flash units attached to the camera accessory shoe as follows Aut FP A 222 em fe A m a ESA a aw 1 kir i TTL m Auto aperture AA w a wa Non TTL auto flash A 2 A A A FP Distance priority manual GN w oi w wa h Hr Manual s e t ad Repeating flash at 4 oe t ad Advanced wireless lighting co J Available with SB 900 and SB 800 only 278 Notes on Optional Flash Units Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions If the flash unit supports CLS refer to the section on CLS compatible digital SLR cameras The D7000 is not included in the digital SLR category in the SB 80DX SB 28DX and SB 50DX manuals If an optional
29. 20 C 68 F HE Repeating Flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing RSIS a strobe light effect Press lt or P to highlight the following a Output Times Frequency MHz Option Description E a 25 1 50 Output Choose flash output expressed as a fraction of full power OSet OK Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected output Note that depending on shutter speed and the option selected for Frequency the actual number of flashes may be less than selected Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second options A or VW to change Times Flash Control Mode The flash control mode for the built in flash is shown in the information display isnt EROF sRGB P TF OF FS a amp ogma Manual and Repeating Flash icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are selected The SB 400 When an optional SB 400 flash unit is attached and turned on Custom Samm Setting e3 changes to Optional flash allowing the flash control mode for the SB 400 to be selected from TTL and Manual Repeating flash amp and Commander mode options are not available Times The options available for Repeating Flash gt Times are determined by flash output Output Options available for Times Output Options available for Times 1 4 2 1 32 2 10 15 1 8 2 5 1 64 2 10 15 20 25 1 16 2 10 1 128 2 10 15 20 25 30 35
30. 4 GB in size and 20 minutes long note that depending on memory card write speed shooting may end before this length is reached M 319 V Recording Movies Flicker banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame flicker and banding can be reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply M 237 Bright light sources may leave after images when the camera is panned Jagged edges false colors and moir may also appear When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or when the mode dial is rotated Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live view when the camera is not use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise and noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instances the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction e The ambient temperature is high e The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies e The camera has been used in conti
31. 45 69 70 73 49 55 57 61 7 77 80 7 77 91 95 96 85 88 107 139 143 145 AR 46 163 165 170 201 191 194 174 47 175 177 Retouching Photographs How do I create retouched copies of photos How do I remove red eye How do I make JPEG copies of RAW NEF photos Can I overlay two NEF RAW photos to make a single image Can I create a copy of a photo that looks like a painting Can trim movie footage on the camera Menus and Settings How do use the menus How do display menus in another language How do use the command dials How do keep the displays from turning off How do focus the viewfinder Can display a framing grid in the viewfinder or the monitor How do tell if the camera is level How do set the camera clock How do format memory cards How do restore default settings How do get help for a menu or message Connections How do copy photos to a computer How do print photos Can print the date of recording on my photos Maintenance and Optional Accessories What memory cards can use What lenses can use What optional flash units Speedlights can use What other accessories are available for my camera What software is available for my camera What do do with the supplied eyepiece cap How do I clean the camera Where should take my camera for servicing and repairs LO 248 264 251 258 256 257 262
32. A Clean image sensor 4 Clean image sensor Pra TE Lock mirror up for cleaning A Video mode Video mode gt kJ HDMI The setup menu contains the following options Option aa Option He Format memory card 236 Auto image rotation 239 Save user settings 75 Image Dust Off ref photo 240 Reset user settings 76 Battery info 242 LCD brightness 237 Wireless transmitter 181 Clean image sensor 284 Copyright information 243 Lock mirror up for cleaning 286 Save load settings 244 Video mode 237 GPS 162 HDMI 194 Virtual horizon 245 Flicker reduction 237 Non CPU lens data 159 Time zone and date 237 AF fine tune 246 Language 238 Eye Fi upload 2 247 Image comment 238 Firmware version 247 1 Not available when battery is low 2 Only displayed when compatible Eye Fi memory card is inserted M 247 Format Memory Card MENU button gt Setup menu To begin formatting choose a memory card slot and select Yes PEmmmmET Note that formatting permanently deletes all pictures and other data on the card in the selected slot Before formatting be sure to t make backup copies as required E o sz Y During Formatting Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting Two Button Format Memory cards can also be formatted by pressing the m f and 3 buttons for more than two seconds M 32 236 LCD Brightness MENU button gt Y Setup menu Press A or W to choose monitor brightness Choose higher E LCD brightn
33. A or F to view photo information M 165 Press the amp button to zoom in on the current frame CO 173 press gt to exit zoom To view six 4 9 S 10007000 1C oon rs raag ORAL pictures at a time press the 9 button Use the multi selector to highlight pictures or press amp to display the highlighted picture full frame to view images in other locations hold the BKT button press A and select the desired card and folder as described on page 164 2 Display printing options a Stw _ Press 8 to display PictBridge printing options a Page size No of copies Border Time stamp f Cropping 183 184 3 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Description Menu of page sizes will be displayed options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press to select and return to previous menu Page size Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or VW to choose number of copies maximum 99 then press to select and return to previous menu No of copies This option is available only if supported by current printer Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or V to choose print style from Printer default print using current printer settings Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to sel
34. Built in Flash sscsssesesssssssecesssssssssssssssesssssesseseessesersesesescessssessesescecseesnees 143 POA MOOO esee E E E mec auetatner en eerstenies 144 Flash Compensatii asco crseasecnesvsasivececesevsasevececoseutgaceuseapsecceussusunpioceetrentsaeemsaxonuatescensexeauinnses 148 BN EOC AEE E E E T EA E A E N E E cara 149 Other Shooting Options 151 Restoring Default Settings sorcecscssameaninniensainin n 151 Multiple EXHOSUTE sesssasscccasseasetesscinsnsatesvadencdsssdeaviseniscesviassonsoseasesssusncoduaneaesaencodesseassaenesbesaiesce 152 Interval Timer Photograph y ccscssscsssssscsssssscscsssessssssesscsssssesscssseseesssesesessssessessseeseees 155 NODC PU LENSE S accra cas aces cesses E RE EEE 159 MFP EE SII A E E A A A E A eae 162 More on Playback 163 FUME FT ane PlayDac Kornis 163 Photo Information iisvasiscasnssnssaiasnssiivnosssnssaveuescavesddvedvoususevonsssunesevensarewonddedanctdacvbecndentevessanconeett 165 TAIN VAN HAY OAC ao e E OA nites 171 Calendar Playback cecasscassctzedsagzasiceatecwcsstadessvsssaess n coinieondsussynatbevecatasnaoavenstaseiactoeanswieedeievieiane 172 Taking a Closer Look Playback ZOOM scssssssssssssssssssssesssssssscsssessesssessssesssessessseeeeees 173 Protecting Photographs from Deletion ceessssesessesssssssscsessssssessessseesesescsseseseseess 174 Deleting PIO COG CAINS scxccasesaseczssssscuscasssasers snscessnssnste snesursenstesaeesiatevtestconsisiesestecmteiasnteeets 175 Full Fr
35. C 68 F e TTL i TTL balanced fill flash and standard i TTL flash for digital SLR using 2 016 pixel RGB sensor are available with built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB 400 i TTL balanced fill flash is available when matrix or center weighted metering is selected e Auto aperture Available with SB 900 SB 800 and CPU lens e Non TTLauto Supported flash units include SB 900 SB 800 SB 28 SB 27 and SB 22S e Distance priority manual Available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 e a amp X Auto auto with red eye reduction off fill flash and red eye reduction available with optional flash units e i Auto slow sync auto slow sync with red eye reduction off slow sync and slow sync with red eye reduction available with optional flash units Wi x FS 28 9 4 i B Fill flash and red eye reduction available with optional flash units e ff Fill flash e PA Fill flash rear curtain with slow sync slow sync slow sync with red eye reduction red eye reduction e S M Fill flash rear curtain sync red eye reduction 3 1 EV in increments of 3 or 1 2 EV Lights when built in flash or optional flash unit such as SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 SB 80DX SB 28DX or SB 50DxX is fully charged blinks for 3 s after flash is fired at full output ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built in flash SB 900 SB 800 SB
36. Daylight saving time 237 defaults to P Auto image rotation On 239 LCD brightness 0 237 GPS Clean image sensor Auto meter off Enable deanar Cleanatstartup amp 44 Use GPS to set camera clock shutdown Eye Fi upload Enable HDMI Output resolution Auto 194 Device conta on 297 Exposure Program Mode P The exposure program for mode P is shown in the following graph ISO 100 lens with maximum aperture of f 1 4 and minimum aperture of f 16 e g AF S NIKKOR 50mm f 1 4G 4 ok gt YR YR YD k amp OA FF D9 NL Aperture AAA 4 8 15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 Shutter speed seconds N 30 1 5 8 4 a The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO sensitivity the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 100 equivalent When matrix metering is used values over 16 3 EV are reduced to 161 3 EV 298 Troubleshooting If the camera fails to function as expected check the list of common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon representative Display Viewfinder is out of focus Adjust viewfinder focus or use optional eyepiece correction lenses M 34 281 Viewfinder is dark Insert a fully charged battery M 21 35 Displays turn off without warning Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay or c4 Monitor off delay N 214 215 Camera do
37. Image quality can also be gt SHOOTING MENU Reset shooting menu adjusted using the Image A Storage folder uality option in the shootin File naming DSC q y p g T Role played by card in Slot2 CO menu m 202 S Image quality NORM Image size JPEG compression El NEF RAW recording Control panel The following options can be accessed from the shooting menu Press the MENU button to display the menus highlight the desired option and press P EE JPEG Compression Choose the type of compression for JPEG images Option Description Si Size priority Images are compressed to produce relatively uniform file size Optimal quality Optimal image quality File size varies with scene recorded EE NEF RAW Recording gt Type Choose the type of compression for NEF RAW images Option Description ON Lossless NEF images are compressed using a reversible algorithm reducing compressed file size by about 20 40 with no effect on image quality NEF images are compressed using a non reversible algorithm ON Compressed reducing file size by about 40 55 with almost no effect on image quality EE NEF RAW Recording gt NEF RAW Bit Depth Choose a bit depth for NEF RAW images Option Description 12 bit 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits bit 14 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 14 bits producing larger files but increasing the color data recorded NEF RAW Images NE
38. L button M 106 Focus can be locked by pressing the shutter release button halfway 6 Take the picture Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot The monitor will turn off 32 7 Exit live view mode Rotate the live view switch to exit live view mode Live View Movie Recording Display Options Press the i button to cycle through display options as shown below Show photo indicators Show movie indicators Hide all indicators a AF S SEH A NORM A1 a _ AF S S PAI Ve r 20mo00 S 1 gt 1080 px gt S gt S LAS L2 oO ote i25 F56 am 008e 1 i25 F56 an OBE I 25 56 igoe 14 25 56 i0082 114 Virtual horizon Framing grid A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie recording when frame sizes other than 640 x 424 are selected for Movie settings gt Movie quality in the shooting menu M 60 when movie indicators are displayed the area outside the crop is greyed out Flicker You may notice flicker or banding in the monitor during live view or when shooting movies under certain types of lighting such as fluorescent or mercury vapor lamps Flicker and banding can be reduced by choosing a Flicker reduction option that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply 237 Exposure Depending on the scene exposure may differ from that which would be obtained when live view is not used Metering in live view is adjusted to suit the live view display prod
39. Landscape sernir E reese earn eee Panty AO Mr ase E E tedeiseuetidentesdanstonaes Beach SONN sisena RE E A B E a E T A PAO DIW opn ee ee ee ee AE E aes Oe EE POM aE orunesenie acon nator seta cemnason alee taeenetae AUN VINA xcs snc cacesscasasaea os aedav eve sense caveceseastes RM FLO SS a AN E besten A ANAA E ho Bh GU I fe ue wy BASIC NAY Oa a E EE entree aide eect te E ene Deleting Unwanted PHotograpns ccsssssssssesssssssssssecssesecsssecsssessssesecsssessssesscseseeassess Live View 49 Framing Photographs in the Monitor sseesessssesseessesseessesssessesssesseesecosersseoseesseoseossessess 49 Recording and Viewing Movies 57 Recording IWOWIES iiccacssccsstiscvectsousnsiniceuisesvussasseutussaussnsciniciuselvaveiuiivabsievtnedetcbs Tesehiveiathiehaatavteuee 57 VIG WIIG VIG VICES ii a E AVENTE renter eae meter 62 Editing MOVIES ccgasstecctrorsvncsetistenias i err ra I EE EEA 63 TMINN MOVOS scaron E e T 63 Saving Selected FraMes csscscsssssssssssssssscssssssssssecsesessesesscsesessesesscessecesesecesseseesssecesseesesees 66 P S A and M Modes 67 Mode P Programmed Auto cscsssssssssssssssssecssssssssssscsssssssessesecsssecesseseesssecassessesssecessees 68 Mode S Shutter Priority Auto sesessssessseesssessseessseesseeoseeosseeosseesseeosseosserosseroseeosseossseossee 69 Mode A Aperture Priority AutO sse ssseesssesssesssseesseesssessssessseeosseesseesneeosserosseesseessse
40. M Connecting Cables Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface cables Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle Close the camera connector cover when the connector is not in use Printing Multiple Pictures 1 Display the PictBridge menu MENU button Press the MENU button in the PictBridge playback display see Step 3 on page 183 i 100D7000 DSC_0 15 04 2010 10 02 2 Choose an option Highlight one of the following options and press gt gt Select date x r Print DPOF e Print select Select pictures for printing i e Select date Print one copy of all the pictures taken on a selected date e Print DPOF Print an existing print order created with the Print set DPOF option in the playback menu M 189 The current print order will be displayed in Step 3 To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print See page 188 for more information EE 185 3 Select pictures or choose a date If you chose Print select or Print DPOF in 7 Print select Step 2 use the multi selector to scroll through PERSSE the pictures on the memory card to view fe Fel amp images in other locations hold the BKT peas lt a fin button press A and select the desired card eat cee enn and folder as described on page 164 To display the current picture full screen press and hold the amp button To select the current pictu
41. Selecting On enables the following viewfinder warnings GS 44 Viewfinder warning display e B W Displayed when a monochrome Picture Control is r selected Y e am Displayed when the battery is low E Off e q Displayed if no memory card is inserted in the camera a d5 Screen Tips MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display tool tips for items selected in the 45 Screen tips information display d6 CL Mode Shooting Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the maximum frame advance rate in CL continuous low PETEM speed mode during interval timer photography this setting also determines the frame advance rate for single frame Note that the frame advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter speeds d7 Max Continuous Release MENU button gt Custom Settings menu The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single E 7 Max continuous release burst in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100 The Memory Buffer Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d7 shooting will slow when the memory buffer fills See page 320 for more information on the capacity of the memory buffer 217 d8 File Number Sequence MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When a photograph is taken the camera names the file by 48 File number sequence adding one to the last file number used This option controls whether file numb
42. SiZ0 nnn 88 Delete current image 47 175 Flash shutter speed 145 223 Incandescent White balance 117 Delete selected images 176 Flash sync speed 222 223 310 dary print s 188 Depth of field uu esessessssesseseeees 72 Flash WADING srvescrseserssesersesersseserses 219 In focus indicator 38 97 100 Depth of field preview button 72 Flexible program 68 Information vasssssnsseseue 10 165 228 232 Flicker reduction sania 23 59 237 Information display 10 219 Destination Movie settings 60 Fluorescent White balance 117 Interval timer shooting 155 Device control HDMI eee 194 Fn button uses 149 161 230 ISO display and adjustment a 216 Digital Print Order Format 182 F NUMD ES ccescecccescsscecsscescscecescecens 70 ISO sensitivity eet 101 103 185 189 318 Focal length ccscisssiesttcrsssetsseccs 160 274 ISO sensitivity settings 102 103 Diopter adjustment control 34 Focal length scale cceseseeseees 25 ISO sensitivity step value 211 281 Focal plane Mark wnmeneneron Oo een 146 225 Direct sunlight White balance Focus indicator 38 97 100 117 FOCUS IOGK auisscusietincnemmwnauin 97 Pe Display MOde mnnnnnensnnen og ON ee BP MPEG O 85 Distortion Control ques 261 Focus point3s gt 0 24 76 100 207 JPEG asl aceeauencanccuaseonceacs 85 DLONI eeeeemeeeere meres comer 251 210 JPEG compression c ss
43. Take pictures The flash will pop up as required when the shutter release button is pressed halfway and fire when a photograph is taken fthe flash does not pop up automatically DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand Failure to observe this precaution could damage the flash EE Using the Built in Flash P A M and t1 Modes 1 Raise the flash Press the 4 button to raise the flash 2 Choose a flash mode M 144 3 Take pictures The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken button Lowering the Built in Flash To save power when the flash is not in use press it gently downward until the latch clicks into place 143 Flash Mode The flash modes available vary with shooting mode O 6 4 3 tf p4 Auto slowsync fo avr Auto fag red eye reduction Fill flash Se 9 autoj Auto red eye reduction auto Auto slow sync Off off PA S M Fill flash i Fill flash y 4 A Red eye reduction Red eye reduction sI d ducti R stow Slow sync red eye reduction ear curtain sync 4 m Slow sync 7 Rear curtain slow sync REAR SLOW is displayed when setting is complete To choose a flash mode press the button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel M The Built in Flash Use with lenses with focal lengths of 16 300 mm M 271 Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2
44. The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals I Before Shooting Do not select self timer or remote m release mode when using the interval timer Before beginning interval timer photography take a test shot at current settings and view the results in the monitor Before choosing a starting time select Time zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date M 237 Use of a tripod is recommended Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins To ensure that shooting is not interrupted be sure the battery is fully charged 1 Select Interval timer shooting Press the MENU button to display the menus Z m SHOOTING MENU Highlight Interval timer shooting in the O ENa High ISO NR _ ISO sensitivity settings 4 Multiple exposure Ly Movie settings Interval timer shooting OFF shooting menu and press P EJ Remote control mode G2s 2 Choosea starting time TTE oose start time Chose from the following starting triggers r OP NELA e To start shooting immediately highlight Now gt a and press Shooting begins about 3 s 5 00 0100 after settings are completed proceed to y CT Step 3 e Tochooseastarting time highlight Start time GS Interval timer shooting oStart time and press to display the start time P Ei options shown at right Press lt or P to l am highlight hours or minutes and
45. Units The camera can be used with the following CLS compatible flash units e The SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 Feature SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 Guide O 34111 111 38 125 125 28 92 30 98 21 21 69 Boao esr i ssaa soras aanas 30798 1 fa color filter is attached to the SB 900 when AUTO or 5 flash is selected for white balance the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance appropriately 2 Controlled remotely with built in flash in commander mode or using optional SB 900 SB 800 or SB 700 flash unit or SU 800 wireless Speedlight commander 3 m ft 20 C 68 F SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 at 35 mm zoom head position SB 900 and SB 700 with standard illumination e The SU 800 wireless speedlight commander When mounted on a CLS compatible camera the SU 800 can be used as a commander for remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units in up to three groups The SU 800 itself is not equipped with a flash SB R200 2 Guide Number To calculate the range of the flash at full power divide the Guide Number by the aperture For example at ISO 100 the SB 800 has a Guide Number of 38 m or 125 ft 35 mm zoom head position its range at an aperture of f 5 6 is 38 5 6 or about 6 8 meters or in feet 125 5 6 approximately 23 ft 7 in For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity multiply the Guide Number by the square root
46. all histograms horizontal axis gives pixel brightness vertical axis number of pixels 8 Histogram red channel PE Histogram green channel i Histogram blue channel 1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode M 197 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for the current channel Hold 9 button amp 2 button and press lt q or P to cycle most channels as follows RGB all eee el a mr ua Highlight display off Playback Zoom To zoom in on the photograph when the histogram is displayed press amp Use the amp and 3 buttons to zoom in and out and scroll the image with the multi selector The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the monitor mine 6 rA Histograms Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from those displayed in imaging applications Some sample histograms are shown below If the image contains objects with a wide range of brightnesses the distribution of tones will be relatively even If the image is dark tone distribution will be shifted to the left If the image is bright tone distribution will be shifted to the right Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution oft tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photograph
47. always lit or that do not light This is common to all TFT LCD monitors and does not indicate a malfunction Images recorded with the product are unaffected Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor as this could cause damage or malfunction Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth Replace the monitor cover when transporting the camera or leaving it unattended Batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat e Keep the battery terminals clean e Turn the product off before replacing the battery e Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and replace the terminal cover These devices draw minute amounts of charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point that it will no longer function If the battery will not be used for some time insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 to 25 C 59 to 77 F avoid hot or ex
48. and M and aperture modes A and M are made in increments of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl V 211 Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to choose a lens number specified using the Non CPU lens data option 159 Fn button performs same function as gt button Select when using a telephoto lens or in other circumstances in which it is difficult to operate the gt button with your left hand Press the Fn button in live view to start movie recording 57 Viewfinder Virtual Horizon When Viewfinder virtual horizon is selected for Custom Setting f3 Assign Fn button the exposure indicator in the viewfinder can be used as a tilt meter Press the Fn button to toggle between exposure and tilt meter displays Viewfinder Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back 231 f4 Assign Preview Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the depth of field preview button The options available are the same as for Assign Fn button CO 230 the default setting is Preview f5 Assign AE L AF L Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the AE L AF L button Option Description fy AE AF Focus and exposure lock while the AE L AF L button is lock pressed AE lock AE only Exposure locks while the AE L AF L button is pressed
49. blinking icon will appear in the control panel Date format Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Turn daylight saving time on or off The camera clock will automatically be advanced or set back one hour The default setting is Off Time zone Date and time Daylight saving time 237 238 Language MENU button gt Setup menu Choose a language for camera menus and messages The following options are available Option Description Option Description Option Description e tina Czech Nederlands Dutch is Arabic Dansk Danish Norsk Norwegian Traditional Deutsch German Polski Polish Px FERB Chinese English English Portugu s Portuguese mem Simplified XC fel 4 Espa ol Spanish Pycckn Russian Chinese Fran ais French Suomi Finnish AAs Japanese Indonesia Indonesian Svenska Swedish eta Korean Italiano Italian T rk e Turkish mlne Thai Image Comment MENU button gt Setup menu Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Q 281 The comment is also visible on the third shooting data page in the photo information display M 169 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Input comment Input a comment as described on page 137 Comments can be up to 36 characters long e Attach comment Select this option to attach the comment PENH to all subsequent photographs Attach
50. button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteriesin the BET battery pack are used first when an optional MB D11 battery pack is attached Note that if the MB D11 is powered by an Y optional EH 5a AC adapter and EP 5B power connector the AC MEOE E adapter will be used regardless of the option selected A icon is displayed in the camera control panel when the batteries in the MB D11 are in use The information display shows the type of battery inserted in the MB D11 as follows icon Battery type EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery cma AA batteries igm sow oF sR OG iF mF CD A A om 221 e Bracketing Flash e1 Flash Sync Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls flash sync speed Option Description Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and 1 320s SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 320 s Auto FP When the camera shows a shutter speed of 320 s in mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 320 s Use auto FP high speed sync with SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and 1 250s SB R200 flash units If other flash units are used shutter speed is set to 1 250 s Auto FP When the camera shows a shutter speed of 250 s in mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 2
51. button gt Custom Settings menu To ensure that the camera functions as expected when the optional MB D11 battery pack is used with AA batteries match the option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in the battery pack There is no need to adjust this option when using EN EL15 batteries Option Description LRG LR 6 AA alkaline Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries BNi4H HR6 AA Ni MH Select when using HR6 Ni MH AA batteries OFR6 FR6 AA lithium Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries Using AA Batteries The MB D11 takes one EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery or six AA alkaline Ni MH or lithium batteries an EN EL15 is supplied with the camera AA batteries are available separately Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries V 321 The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 C 68 F and varies with make and storage conditions in some cases batteries may cease to function before their expiry date Some AA batteries can not be used due to their performance characteristics and limited capacity alkaline batteries should only be used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows Controlpanel Viewfinder Description Batteries fully charged a _ m Lowbattery Ready fresh batteries en a Shutter release disabled Change batteries blinks blinks d14 Battery Order MENU
52. button gt gh retouch menu Create a cropped copy of the selected photograph The 41920 1280 812 SAspect selected photograph is displayed with the selected crop shown rae in yellow create a cropped copy as described in the following table To Description Reduce size of crop Press the 9 button to reduce the size of the crop a Press the amp button to increase the size of the crop Te Rotate the main command dial to switch between aspect Change crop aspect ratio SY ratios of 3 2 4 3 5 4 1 1 and 16 9 Increase size of crop gt A X vid Use multi selector to move the crop to another area of the Move crop ae DJA Image Create copy B Save the current crop as a separate file Trim Image Quality and Size Copies created from NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG photos have an image quality 21 85 of JPEG fine cropped copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio and appears at upper left in the crop display Viewing Cropped Copies Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are displayed 252 Monochrome MENU button gt gh retouch menu Copy photographs in Black and white Sepia or E Monochrome Cyanotype blue and white monochrome Y Black and white gt Sepia E Cyanotype Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a preview of Increase the selected image press A to incr
53. button f 2 E White balance Select White balance in the shooting menu oA ME then highlight a white balance option and p press gt If an option other than Auto Be Fluorescent Choose color temp or Preset B oose color temp manual is selected proceed to Step 2 If Auto Fluorescent or Choose color temp is selected highlight the desired setting and press If Preset manual is selected choose a preset as described on page 128 before proceeding 2 Fine tune white balance E White balance Use the multi selector to fine tune white balance White balance can be fine tuned on the amber A blue B axis and the green G magenta M axis The horizontal amber blue axis corresponds to color Coordinates temperature with each increment Adjustment equivalent to about 5 mired The vertical green magenta axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color compensation CC filters Increase blue Increase green Increase amber Increase magenta 119 120 3 Press Press to save settings and return to the shooting menu An asterisk is displayed in the control panel when fine 56 tuning is in effect a T p EE The WB Button At settings other than LEI Choose color temp and PRE Preset manual the WB button can be used to fine tune white balance on the amber A blue B axis M 119 to fine tune white balance when or PRE is selected use the shooting menu a
54. camera records up to 6 H frames per second 2 Quiet shutter release As for single frame except that mirror does not click back into place Q while shutter release button is fully pressed allowing user to control timing of click made by mirror which is also quieter than in single frame mode In addition beep does not sound regardless of setting selected for Custom Setting d1 Beep A 215 Self timer Use self timer for self portraits or to reduce blurring caused by camera shake 80 Remote control Shutter is controlled using shutter release button on optional ML L3 remote control 4 80 Mirror up Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto or close up MUP photography or in other situations in which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred photographs M 83 1 Average frame rate with an EN EL15 battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster remaining settings other than Custom Setting d6 at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 2 Average frame rate with an EN EL15 battery continuous servo AF manual or shutter priority auto exposure a shutter speed of 250 s or faster other settings at default values and memory remaining in memory buffer 7 78 Continuous Mode CH CL To take pictures in CH continuous high speed and CL continuous low speed modes 1 Select CH or CL mode Press the release mode dial l
55. card is locked Slide lock to write position Memory card is locked write protected A l p Slide card write protect 33 itch to write ition Not available if Eye Fi card is locked op wite position Eye Fi card is locked 7 write protected This card is not 7 Memory card has not x _ Format memory card or insert formatted been formatted for usein 29 32 blinks new memory card Format the card camera Failed to update flash unit firmware Flash cannot be Firmware for flash unit Contact a Nikon authorized used mounted on camera was i service representative Contact a Nikon not updated correctly p authorized service representative 307 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem Select folder containing images from Playback folder menu or insert different memory card No images can be played back until another folder has been selected orHideimage 196 used to allow at least one image to be displayed File has been created or Cannot display this mowed ee File can not be played back No images on memory card or in folder s Folder contains no 29 195 images selected for playback Allimages are hidden All photos in current folder are hidden computer or different file _ _ On camera make of camera or file is corrupt Images created with other devices can not be 249 retouched e Movies created with other The selected movie can devices can
56. comment can be 3 turned on and off by highlighting it and pressing P Done TA Input comment M Attach comment bSet Auto Image Rotation MENU button gt Y Setup menu Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on camera orientation allowing them to be rotated automatically during playback M 163 or when viewed in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately Q 281 The following orientations are recorded r Ms gt Landscape wide Camera rotated 90 Camera rotated 90 orientation clockwise counter clockwise Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with the lens pointing up or down Rotate Tall To automatically rotate tall portrait orientation photographs for display during playback select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu M 200 Note that because the camera itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review M 163 239 Image Dust Off Ref Photo MENU button gt Setup menu Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 available separately for more information see the Capture NX 2 manual Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted on the camera A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way
57. copies are to be provided for business use by a company Also do not copy or reproduce passports issued by the government licenses issued by public agencies and private groups ID cards and tickets such as passes and meal coupons e Comply with copyright notices The copying or reproduction of copyrighted creative works such as books music paintings woodcuts prints maps drawings movies and photographs is governed by national and international copyright laws Do not use this product for the purpose of making illegal copies or to infringe copyright laws Disposing of Data Storage Devices Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage devices does not completely erase the original image data Deleted files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially available software potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image data Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for preset manual M 123 Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
58. device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occurina particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help FC Nikon D7000 CAUTIONS Modifications The FCC requires the user be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Interface Cables Use the interface cables sold or provided by Nikon for your equipment Using other interface cables may exceed the limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules Notice for Customers in the State of
59. displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting See Also See page 164 for information on choosing a memory card slot Deleting Unwanted Photographs To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor press the button Note that photographs can not be recovered once deleted 1 Display the photograph Display the photograph you wish to delete as described on the preceding page i 10007000 001 NORMAL 15 04 2010 4928x3264 2 Delete the photograph i button Press the f button A confirmation dialog will be displayed with an icon at bottom left showing the location of the current picture 3 T Delete press the 1 button again to delete the image ae and return to playback to exit without TN OO7000 DSE DOT IPE o NORDAL N4E24 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 deleting the picture press gt Delete To delete selected images 1 176 all images taken on a selected date M 177 or all images in a chosen location on a selected memory card M 176 use the Delete option in the playback menu 47 48 Live View Framing Photographs in the Monitor Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view 1 Rotate the live view switch The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be displayed in the camera monitor The subject will no longer be visible in the viewfinder a 9 lt 220m008f ee i T H ol ag Note For illustrat
60. e5 Auto Bracketing Set MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the setting or settings affected by bracketing M 109 Choose AE amp flash AE to perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE only AE to bracket only exposure Flash only to perform only flash level bracketing WB bracketing WB to perform white balance bracketing 1 112 or ADL bracketing 8 to perform Active D Lighting bracketing M 114 Note that white balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG e6 Bracketing Order MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of MTR gt under gt over IN exposure flash and white balance bracketing are performed in the order described on pages 109 and 112 If Under gt MTR gt over gt is selected shooting will proceed in order from the lowest to the highest value This setting has no effect on ADL bracketing f1 amp Switch MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose what happens when the power switch is rotated to amp Option Description 6 LCD backlight 8 Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s Control panel backlight illuminates and shooting information is displayed in monitor f2 OK Button Shooting Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the button during shooting selecting the center focus point RESET Select center focus point highlighting the
61. flash indicator in the camera viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be underexposed Note that the flash ready indicators on optional flash units will not display this warning when 1 320 s Auto FP is selected e2 Flash Shutter Speed MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option determines the slowest shutter speed available Flash shutter speed when front or rear curtain sync or red eye reduction is used in 130 mode P or A regardless of the setting chosen shutter speeds can be as slow as 30 s in S and M modes or at flash settings of slow sync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Options range from 1 60 s 1 60 s to 30 s 30s e3 Flash Cntrl for Built in Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the flash mode for the built in flash Option Description Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to shooting TTL TTL he conditions Choose the flash level V 224 The camera does not emit monitor pre Me Manual flashes The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a strobe RPT Repeating flash light effect 1A 224 Use the built in flash as a master flash controlling one or more remote CMD Commander mode optional flash units 225 223 224 EE Manual Choose a flash level between Full and 1 128 128 of full power At full power the built in flash has a Guide Number of 12 39 m ft ISO 100
62. flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than the flash will fire with every shot even in modes in which the built in flash can not be used i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings If the flash ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed When an SC series 17 28 or 29 sync cable is used for off camera flash photography correct exposure may not be achieved in i TTL mode We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i TTL flash control Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor In i TTL use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash unit Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels as this may produce incorrect exposure The SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction while the SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SU 800 provide AF assist illumination with the following restrictions e SB 900 AF assist illumination is available for all 000000000 000000000 focus points with 17 135 mm AF lenses Do02000000 00002900000 00002920000 however autofocus is available only with the 17 19mm 20 105 mm 106 135 mm focus points shown at right if other focus points are selected the AF assist illuminator may not provide sufficient
63. i i Y Select i a destination for the resized copies by gt highlighting Choose destination and pressing gt E Choose size 25M if only one card is inserted proceed to Step 3 YA The menu shown at right will be displayed B Resize highlight a card slot and press Se aa T 1 1 OK BiW Slot E A Slot2 3 Choose a size E Resize Highlight Choose size and press P T Select image Choose destination aL Choose size The following options will be displayed highlight f Resize Choose size an option and press 6 9 fea192011280 25M OR z z z z A 7 aly x 856 1 Option Size pixels Option Size pixels Dem 960x 6400S M WE 03m 640x 424 0 3 M 2 5M 1920 x 1280 0 3M 640 x 424 01M 320x 216 0 1 M 1 1M 1280 x 856 0 1M 320 x216 0 6M 960 x 640 259 4 Choose pictures ce Resize Highlight Select image and press gt ye Select image gt Choose destination fe Choose size The dialog shown at right will be displayed Gs Resize e Select image highlight pictures using the multi selector and T press the 9 button to select or deselect to view RA the highlighted picture full screen press and hold A gt E r Eo 100 4 100 5 100 6 the amp button to view images in other locations as Dye aoa es Bk described on page 164 hold BKT and press A Selected pictures are marked by a Em icon Press when the selection is complete 5 Save the resized copies A confirmation dialog
64. in publishing and commercial printing sRGB is recommended when taking photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management or when taking photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint the direct printing option on some household printers or kiosk printing or other commercial print services Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these options but colors will not be as vivid JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2 3 and DCF 2 0 compliant applications and printers that support Exif 2 3 and DCF 2 0 will select the correct color space automatically If the application or device does not support Exif 2 3 and DCF 2 0 select the appropriate color space manually For more information see the documentation provided with the application or device Nikon Software ViewNxX 2 supplied and Capture NX 2 available separately automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with the camera S Flash Photography Using the Built in Flash The built in flash has a Guide Number GN 12 39 m ft ISO 100 20 C 68 F and provides coverage for the angle of view of a 16 mm lens It can be used not only when natural lighting is inadequate but to fill in shadows and backlit subjects or to add a catch light to the subject s eyes BE Using the Built in Flash a 2 i X3 and Modes 1 Choose a flash mode m 144 2
65. lens aperture ring to adjust aperture M 233 e Non CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode A or M M 270 No photo taken when remote control shutter release button is pressed e Replace battery in remote control QI 281 e Choose remote control release mode M 80 e Flash is charging 21 82 e Time selected for Custom Setting c5 Remote on duration M 215 has elapsed press camera shutter release button halfway e Bright light is interfering with remote Photos are out of focus e Rotate focus mode selector to AF M 91 e Camera unable to focus using autofocus use manual focus or focus lock 4 97 99 Focus does not lock when shutter release button is pressed halfway Use AE L AF L button to lock focus when AF C is selected for focus mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF A mode Can not select focus point e Unlock focus selector lock M 96 e auto area AF or face priority AF selected for AF area mode choose another mode e Camera is in playback mode M 163 or menus are in use M 195 e Press shutter release button halfway to turn monitor off or activate exposure meters M 39 Subject tracking AF not available Select a non monochrome Picture Control 21 131 Can not select AF area mode Manual focus selected M 55 99 Only one shot taken each time shutter release button is pressed in continuous release mode Lower built in flash QO 143 Image size can not be changed Image quality
66. menu This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large changes in the distance to the subject when AF C is selected or continuous servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode for viewfinder photography Q 91 Option Description AFE 5 Long AFE 4 When the distance to the subject changes abruptly the camera waits for the specified period before adjusting the distance to the subject This prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by objects AF 2 passing through the frame AFz 1 Short AF 3 Normal The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance to the subject Off changes Use when photographing a series of subjects at varying distances in quick succession a4 AF Point Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the viewfinder Option Description The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as needed to establish AUTO Auto contrast with the background The selected focus point is always highlighted regardless of the brightness of On the background Depending on the brightness of the background the selected focus point may be difficult to see Off The selected focus point is not highlighted a5 Focus Point Wrap Around MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether focus point selection wraps around from one edge of the display to another Option Descript
67. menu button nner 18 125 BE Infrared receiver rear sssssssssesseessenseesnsee 81 Bom help protect button ssssssssssssssssseeessss tees EQ Focus selector lock 96 WB white balance button ssssssesssssssssssseess 117 c3 ihumbnail playbackzoonvout button 21 Memory card access lamp s sssseesssssssssssseesssse 29 38 E E 171 172 BA BB info button vss 10 12 53 ISO ISO sensitivity button ss sssssosssssssessssseeesss 101 The Mode Dial The camera offers a choice of the following modes Mode dial VN QW P S A and M Modes Select these modes for full control over camera settings e P Programmed auto M 68 e S Shutter priority auto N 69 e A Aperture priority auto A 70 e M Manual Q 71 Auto Modes Select these modes for simple point and shoot photography e Auto M 35 e Auto flash off A 35 Scene Modes M 40 The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene Match your selection to the scene being photographed U1 and U2 Modes M 75 Store and recall customized shooting settings Non CPU Lenses Non CPU M 270 lenses can be used only in modes A and M Selecting another mode when a non CPU lens is attached disables the shutter release The Release Mode Dial To choose a release mode press the release mode dial Release mode dial lock release lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setti
68. mode 3 Select a menu PLAYBACK MENU i Delete Press A or W to select the desired menu B Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode 4 Copy image s mage review After delete EJ Rotate tall 4 Position the cursor in the selected menu a Press to position the cursor in the selected Z Playback folder D7000 Hide i ANS menu inate Copy image s Image review After delete EJ Rotate tall 19 5 Highlight a menu item ma PLAYBACKMENU e Delete Press A or W to highlight a menu item gt Playback folder Hide image _ Display mode A Copy image s fe OFF After delete Aas EJ Rotate tall OFF 3 OHS HTS SS 6 Display options my Image review O O O O O O OO Press to display options for the selected menu item 7 Highlight an option ga mage review Press A or W to highlight an option a 8 Select the highlighted item Press to select the highlighted item To exit without making a selection press the MENU button Note the following e Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available e While pressing generally has the same effect as pressing 6 there are some cases in which selection can only be made by pressing 68 e To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway CQ 39 20 First Steps Charge the Battery The camera is powered by an EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery supplied To maximize shootin
69. mode idl cssessssesesseseseseeseseeseeen 7 77 K exposure compensation button 107 Bes Mode dial s cansinseanmnnianmnmitmnnamc 6 Two button reset Dutton s sssssessserssessserssrrsersss 151 E Eyelet for camera strap k wes metering button ssssssssssssssssssresssssseeeesssss 105 Release mode dial lock release 7 77 FORT format button s ssessessessessessessesssesessessssseessess 32 IEJ Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 275 11 Eyelet for camera strap J Accessory shoe cover uusssssvsssssssssvssvssssesresresseeees 275 K Focal plane mark sssssssssssesesssseseseseseeseseseeses 100 Power SWITCH ssssssssssssssestestesssstestesrestestestestestentestestsans D gt MED Control Panels O ET 8 BEY Shutter release button sssssasssassesnsesnseen 38 39 The Power Switch Rotate the power switch as shown to turn Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on the camera off The Camera Body Continued 1 ESTs a lashes 143 p AF mode button sssasssssessnensesnenen 50 92 95 E 4 flash mode button ssss sssssssssssssssssrsssssrrssses 143 KJ Focus mode selector sssssssssssesnsesnsenssenen 91 99 flash compensation button sssessseeen 148 BBY Meter coupling lever sssssssssssesssssnsesssesnee 310 JEJ BKT bracketing DUttOM sssssssesseenee 109 164 PE Minii eass 83 286 Infrared receiver front v sssssssssssssssssessssessssee
70. next or previous image is displayed after an image is deleted M 200 175 The Playback Menu The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following options Note that depending on the number of images some time may be required for deletion Option Description nom Selected Delete selected pictures Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date 1 177 Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for ALL All playback M 195 If two cards are inserted you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted T H Slot 1 OK E A Slot2 EE Selected Deleting Selected Photographs 1 Choose Selected MENU button Press the MENU button and select Delete in the playback menu Highlight Selected and py Delete press gt 2 EEs Selected gt 150 ca DATE Select date T ALL AIl 2 Highlight a picture m Dete Use the multi selector to highlight a picture to view the highlighted picture full screen 5 FEKA RA press and hold the amp button to view images in other locations hold the BKT button press A and select the desired card and folder as described on page 164 f CU bY a COV AT mn 010 4 3 Select the highlighted picture P Press the 8 amp 2 button to select the A 5 A ras highlighted picture Selected pictures are S X pi RA marked by a icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to 5 z ae N select additional pictures to deselect a set zoom K picture h
71. noise reduction indicator 205 Eg Movie guall sccscsasectiessestiertareettctstinisternteistin E Autofocus mode Copyright information cscecssseeesssseeessseeeessseees 243 Bee Beep indicator ssisssaascstnsenasna cement 215 Ex Clock not set indicators 28 237 EE Multiple exposure indicator 153 EX Image comment indicator sscsssssesseseessenen 238 Z4 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 109 PTJ Release MOC ssesaesrsesueueruesesstaesenietieseie 7 77 WB bracketing indicator essessecseseseeseeseees 112 a Continuous shooting speed 78 217 ADL bracketing indicator essessssssesceecseeseeees 114 Eye Fi connection indicatOt aescsmsesnuseeeeoe 247 25 ADL bracketing aMOunt ssssssssssssssssssrssnsstesstene i PV lock indicator scssscssssaessnssssesrsenciaesnncesstatesnecesietts 149 FJ Interval timer indicator AN AAN 157 plas hicompensation ind Catr caxaractenatae 148 Camera battery indicator ssscsessecsessssseeseens 35 Exposure compensation indicator sesso 107 Turning the Monitor Off To clear shooting information from the monitor press the iM button twice more or press the shutter release button halfway The monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about 10 seconds See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay N 215 For information on changing the color of the lette
72. not affected by two button resets Note that as the exposure compensation Ei icon is not displayed the only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine tuning menu Exposure compensation C4 107 is preferred in most situations c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Off exposure only locks when the AE L PEETEENITIN AF L button is pressed If On is selected exposure will also lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway d 213 214 c2 Auto Meter off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera continues to meter exposure GS 02 Auto meter off delay 4s 4s when no operations are performed The shutter speed and 6s 3 DBs 8 aperture displays in the control panel and viewfinder turn off oo automatically when the exposure meters turn off pe Choose a shorter meter off delay for longer battery life ope Diin 10 min c3 Self Timer MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the length of the shutter release delay the number of PEEN shots taken and the interval between shots in self timer mode Y ca Number of shots 1 Interval between shots is e Self timer delay Choose the length of the shutter release delay PENET Self timer delay rd T Ses 2s 5s 5s E 2ls 20 s e Number of shots Press A and VW to choose the n
73. not be edited not be edited e Movies must be at least 65 two seconds long Check printer Printer error COECK PrE KETE UME 182 select Continue if available fe in printer isnot of Insert paper of correct size 7 Paper jam Paper anned in Clear jam and EA 183 printer Continue Insert paper of selected size Out of paper Printer is out of paper and elect Contini 182 Check ink supply imkero O Check ink To resume select 192 Continue Continue See printer manual for more information Cannot select this file Selected image can not be retouched This movie cannot be edited 308 Specifications BE Nikon D7000 Digital Camera Type Type Single lens reflex digital camera Lens mount Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective angle of view Approx 1 5 x lens focal length Nikon DX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 16 2 million Image sensor Image sensor 23 6 X 15 6 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 16 9 million Dust reduction System Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data optional Capture NX 2 software required Storage Image size pixels e 4 928 x 3 264 L e 3 696 x 2 448 M e 2 464 x 1 632 S File format e NEF RAW 12 or 14 bit lossless compressed or compressed e JPEG JPEG Baseline compliant with fine approx 1 4 normal approx 1 8 or basic approx 1 16 compression Size priority Optimal quality compression availabl
74. or existing ph raph as PRE Preset manual lee subject light source or existing photograp reference for white balance 123 All values are approximate Fine tuning set to 0 White balance is set by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel WB button Main command dial Control panel 117 118 The Shooting Menu White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance a SHOOTING MENU option in the shooting menu 202 which also can be used to af fine tune white balance M 119 or measure a value for preset y white balance M 123 The Auto option in the White balance Color space menu offers a choice of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors H which preserves the warm colors produced by incandescent High ISO NR lighting while the Fluorescent option can be used to select the light source from the bulb types Studio Flash Lighting Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance Color Temperature The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source defined with reference to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths W
75. or manually M 99 The user can also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus M 96 or use focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing M 97 Autofocus To use autofocus rotate the focus mode selector to AF Focus mode selector Autofocus Mode Choose from the following autofocus modes Mode Description AF A Auto servo AF Camera automatically selects single servo autofocus if subject is stationary continuous servo autofocus if subject is moving Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed AF S halfway At default settings shutter can only be released when in focus indicator is displayed focus priority Q 208 Continuous servo AF For moving subjects Camera focuses continuously while shutter release button is pressed halfway if subject moves camera will engage predictive focus AF C tracking M 93 to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary At default settings shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus release priority A 208 91 To select the autofocus mode press the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel AF mode button Main command dial Control panel Viewfinder 92 Predictive Focus Tracking In AF C mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected in AF A mode the came
76. order sseesssssssseessssceesssees 221 Battery pack 220 221 235 242 280 DEED einGnnani antennas 215 216 253 BIG ossigenata 119 255 Blue intensifier Filter effects 254 Body Cal wecitnrcmarnaien 4 25 281 Border PictBridge 184 187 BraCketing sssssssssessseerees 109 229 Bracketing OFel csssseceseesees 229 Built in AF assist illuminator 210 BUID eeeeeeaere ern re fon pere err 71 73 DUNS tiiis 153 217 230 C Calendar playback scessecseees 172 Camera Control Pro 2 cc000 281 Capture NX 2 oc isssssnsunns 240 281 CEC errr marr ere Terr 194 Center weighted area 213 Charging a battery 21 Choose color temp White balance esessssesessssecseeeesees 117 122 Choose end point eeesesseseeseees 63 Choose Start point ceseeseseseees 63 CL mode shooting speed 217 Clean image Sensor csesseeeeees 284 ClOCk nnnsnssssenssseesssesessseesssseessseessss 27 237 Clock Dattelry diadneronneucuennee 28 Cloudy White balance 117 OS epee eee 276 Color Dalance csscssssssecssceeesees 255 Color outline we esteceeeseeeeee 262 E Focus mode switch 25 99 Color sketch sesser 262 ae FOM atiis 32 236 Color Spade ceronecacocsamsa 141 Easy exposure compensation 212 Format memory Card use 32 236 Color temperature 117 118 122 Edit MOVIC essere 64 66 Frame interval Slide show 201 Commander MOE
77. photographs directly to the computer hard disk Note Use the latest versions of Nikon software Most Nikon software offers an auto update feature when the computer is connected to the Internet See the websites listed on page xvii for the latest information on supported operating systems BF 1B and BF 1A Body Caps The body cap keeps the mirror viewfinder screen and low pass filter free of dust when a lens is not in place ML L3 wireless remote control Use as a remote shutter release for self portraits or to prevent blur caused by camera shake The ML L3 uses a 3 V CR2025 battery Pressing the battery chamber latch to the right insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery chamber Ensure that the battery is inserted in the correct orientation The D7000 is equipped with an accessory terminal for MC DC2 remote cords A 73 and GP 1 GPS units 1 162 which connect with the lt mark on the connector aligned with the gt next to the accessory terminal close the camera connector cover when the terminal is not in use 281 Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power connector and AC adapter 1 Ready the camera Open the battery chamber and power connector covers 2 Insert the EP 5B power connector Be sure to insert the connector in the orientation shown using the connector to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one
78. press A or P i 001 x1 0001 to change Press to continue E T es 3 Choose the interval Interval timer shooting Winterva Press lt or P to highlight hours or minutes Bla a and press A or to choose an interval gt i oc longer than the slowest anticipated shutter E 500 0100 speed Press to continue Y Pre 155 156 4 Choose the number of intervals and GS Interval timer shooting Select intervals Xno of shots number of shots per interval P AAE A 0006 gt Press lt or P to highlight number of intervals or number of shots press A or VW to change Press to continue Number of Number Total intervals of shots numberof interval shots Start shooting E Interval timer shooting Highlight On and press to return to the shooting menu without starting the interval C4a9 timer highlight Off and press 68 The first E Sooo series of shots will be taken at the specified 2 SY eee starting time or after about 3 s if Now was selected for Choose start time in Step 2 Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken Note that because shutter speed and the time needed to record the image to the memory card may vary from shot to shot the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary If shooting can not proceed at current settings for example if a shutter speed of burt amp is currently selected in manual exposure mode or the Start time
79. produce the desired results 2 Lock exposure Shutter release button Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway With the shutter release button pressed halfway and the subject positioned in the focus point VS press the AE L AF L button to lock focus and exposure if you are using autofocus confirm that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder __Nikon __s While exposure lock is in effect an AE L indicator will appear in the viewfinder 3 Recompose the photograph Keeping the AE L AF L button pressed recompose the photograph and shoot Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture While exposure lock is in effect the following settings can be adjusted without altering the metered value for exposure Mode Setting Shutter speed and aperture flexible program M 68 Shutter speed Aperture The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel Note that metering can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect See Also If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L M 213 exposure will lock when the shutter release button is pressed halfway For information on changing the role of the AE L AF L button see Custom Setting f5 Assign AE L AF L button 1 232 Exposure Compensation P S A and M Modes Only Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera making pict
80. recommended to prevent blur the flash can also be used M 143 Z Silhouette Low Key Silhouette subjects against bright Use when shooting dark scenes to create backgrounds The built in flash turns off dark somber images that bring out use of a tripod is recommended to highlights The built in flash turns off prevent blur when lighting is poor use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor High Key b S J gt gt i Use when shooting bright scenes to create bright images that seem filled with light The built in flash turns off 45 Basic Playback 1 Press the M button D button A photograph will be displayed in the F monitor The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon 1 1 0D7000 DSC_0012 JPG NORMAL EA LE 11 03 49 4928x3264 2 View additional pictures Additional pictures can be displayed by pressing lt or P ZENE 7 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 10 02 27 124928x3 To view additional information on the current photograph press A and W M 165 NN i 10007000 NORMAL 15 04 2010 4928x3264 NIKON D7000 35mm MHAUTO 0 0 sRGB Ss ASD HAUTO 1 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu M 200 photographs are automatically
81. replaced while the camera is off e Rotating the release mode dial or live view switch To resume shooting 1 Choose anew starting time GS Interval timer shooting Choose a new starting time as described on oC page 155 002 x 2 0004 kl amp Move Set 13 45 2 Resu me shooting E Interval timer shooting Highlight Restart and press Note that if E Restart interval timer photography was paused 5 er during shooting any shots remaining in the E onom current interval will be canceled EN EE nterrupting Interval Timer Photography Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is exhausted Interval timer photography can also be ended by e Selecting Start gt Off in the interval timer menu e Performing a two button reset M 151 e Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu M 202 e Changing bracketing settings M 109 e Terminating multiple exposure shooting M 154 Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends EE No Photograph The camera will skip the current interval if any of the following situations persist for eight seconds or more after the interval was due to start the photograph or photographs for the previous interval have yet to be taken the memory buffer is full or the camera is unable to focus in AF S or when single servo AF is selected in AF A note that the camera focuses again before each shot Shooting will resume with the next interval Non CPU Lense
82. results Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choose for photographs that emphasize primary colors MC Monochrome Take monochrome photographs IPT Portrait Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a rounded feel ALS Landscape Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes ASD Standard ENL Neutral IVI Vivid 1 Display Picture Controls MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button f 2 r___SHOOTINGMENU Highlight Set Picture Control in the a em ESD shooting menu and press P to display a list amp Ei sranna orr of Picture Controls S H ORR Long exp NR OFF EJ High ISO NR NORM 2 Choose a Picture Control ss Set Picture Control Highlight an option and press 5 FNL Neutral Y FAVI Vivid OK __ ENC Monochrome EPT Portrait EILS Landscape 2 Grid Adiust 131 132 Preset Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera are referred to as preset Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the shooting menu M 136 Custom Picture Controls can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of the same model and compatible software CO 138 Optional Picture Controls Additional optional Picture Controls may be availab
83. selected for Movie options gt Manual movie settings in the shooting menu shutter speed can be set to values between 1 8000 s and 1 30 s 60 Colors are unnatural e Adjust white balance to match light source M 117 e Adjust Set Picture Control settings M 131 Can not measure white balance Subject is too dark or too bright M 125 Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance Image was not created with D7000 m 126 White balance bracketing unavailable e NEF RAW or NEF JPEG image quality option selected for image quality M 85 e Multiple exposure mode is in effect M 154 Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image A auto is selected for sharpening contrast or saturation For consistent results over a series of photos choose another setting A 134 Metering can not be changed Autoexposure lock is in effect M 106 Exposure compensation can not be used Choose mode P S or A M 68 69 70 Noise reddish areas or other artifacts appears in long time exposures Enable long exposure noise reduction M 205 Playback Flashing areas shooting data or graphs appear on images Press A or W to choose photo information displayed or change settings for Display mode M 165 197 NEF RAW image is not played back Photo was taken at image quality of NEF JPEG 85 Can not view pictures recorded with other cameras Pictures recorded with other makes of camera may not be displayed corre
84. set to NEF RAW amp 85 Camera is slow to record photos Turn long exposure noise reduction off M 205 Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines appear in photos e Choose lower ISO sensitivity or use high ISO noise reduction 1 101 205 e Shutter speed is slower than 8 s use long exposure noise reduction M 205 AF assist illuminator does not light e AF assist lamp does not light if AF C is selected for autofocus mode M 91 or if continuous servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode Choose AF S If an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode select center focus point M 94 96 e The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded e Off selected for Custom Setting a7 Built in AF assist illuminator M 210 e Illuminator has turned off automatically Illuminator may become hot with continued use wait for lamp to cool down Beep does not sound e Off is selected for Custom Setting d1 Beep M 215 gt Volume e Camera is in quiet shutter release mode M 77 or movie is being recorded M 57 e Focus mode selector is set to M M 99 or AF C is selected for autofocus mode M 91 e Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection N 208 Smudges appear in photographs Clean front and rear lens elements If problem persists perform image sensor cleaning M 284 Sound is not recorded with movies Microphone off is selected for Movie se
85. side The latch locks the connector in place when the connector is fully inserted 3 Close the battery chamber cover Position the power connector cable so that it passes through the power connector slot and close the battery chamber cover 4 connect the AC adapter Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC adapter 3 and the EP 5B power cable to the DC socket AQ icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector 282 Caring for the Camera Storage When the camera will not be used for an extended period replace the monitor cover remove the battery and store the battery in a cool dry area with the terminal cover in place To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area Do not store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that e are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 e are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios e are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning Use a blower to remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After Camera using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly body dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly Important Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage not
86. stop Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops AF with maximum aperture displayed as 4AF and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring 70 Mode M Manual In mode M you control both shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in mode M 1 Rotate the mode dial to M Mode dial 2 Choose aperture and shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed and the sub command dial to set aperture Shutter speed can be set to x 250 or to values between 30 s and 1 8 000 s or the shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time exposure us kr A 73 Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and maximum for the lens Use the exposure indicators to check exposure Shutter speed Aperture Main command dial Sub command dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot 71 72 Depth of Field Preview To preview the effects of aperture press and hold the depth of field preview button The lens will be stopped down to the aperture value selected by the c camera modes P and or the value chosen by the user modes A and M allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder Depth of field preview button Custom Setting e4 Modeling Flash This setting controls whether the built in flash and optional flash units that support the Creative Lighting System CLS see
87. subjects Camera focuses continuously until shutter release button is pressed Focus locks when shutter release button is pressed halfway AF S AF F 125 T S 100182 U4 Monitor To use manual focus rotate the focus mode selector to M and proceed to Step 6 after focusing as described on page 55 3 Choose an AF area mode To choose an AF area mode press the AF mode button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor ka Mode Description Face priority AF The camera automatically detects AF mode Sub command dial and focuses on portrait subjects facing the button camera Use for portraits wA FONA Wide area AF Use for hand held shots of f landscapes and other non portrait subjects Use the multi selector to select the focus point Normal area AF Use for pin point focus on a ka selected spot in the frame A tripod is recommended Subject tracking AF Track a selected subject as it moves through the frame 125 cE 3 19 0 B2 Ns Monitor Live View AF and AF Area Modes The AF and AF area modes for live view can also be Sy 28 Live view movie AF chosen using Custom Setting a8 Live view movie 7 AF LH 21 1 1 Autofocus mode KA i Af area mode 50 4 Choose the focus point 2 face priority AF A double yellow border will be displayed when the camera detects a portrait subject facing the camera if multiple fac
88. television or monitor screen the camera monitor will remain off Close the Connector Cover Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer 193 EE HDMI Options The HDMI option in the setup menu controls output resolution and can be used to enable the camera for remote control from devices that support HDMI CEC High Definition Multimedia Interface Consumer Electronics Control a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used to control peripherals to which they are connected Output Resolution Choose the format for images output to the HDMI device E HDMI x F lt Output resoluti If Auto is selected the camera will automatically select nn i the appropriate format L 480p 480p progressive O progressive E 720p 720p progressive 1080i 1080i interlaced Device Control If On is selected for HDMI gt Device control in the setup menu when the camera is connected to a television that supports HDMI CEC and both the camera and television are on the display shown at right will appear on the television and the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi selector and button during full frame playback and slide shows If Off is selected the television remote can not be used to control the camera Play Slide show HDMI CEC Devices When the camera is connected to an HDMI CEC device FEF will appear in the contro
89. the battery when no charge remains e When the battery is not in use attach the terminal cover and store in a cool dry place e The battery may be hot immediately after use or when the product has been used on battery power for an extended period Before removing the battery turn the camera off and allow the battery to cool e Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the battery such as discoloration or deformation ZN Observe proper precautions when handling the charger e Keep dry Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Do not short the charger terminals Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger e Dust on or near the metal parts of the plug should be removed with a dry cloth Continued use could result in fire e Do not handle the power cable or go near the charger during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock e Do not damage modify or forcibly tug or bend the power cable Do not place it under heavy objects or expose it to heat or flame Should the insulation be damaged and the wires become exposed take the power cable to a Nikon authorized service representative for inspection Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or electric shock e Do not handle the plug or charger with wet hands Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock
90. the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor available only if wide or normal area AF is selected button Navigation window for AF area mode or press 9H to zoom out 55 56 Recording and Viewing Movies Recording Movies Movies can be recorded in live view mode If desired choose a Picture Control M 131 and color space M 141 before recording 1 Rotate the live view switch The mirror is raised and the view through the lens is displayed in the monitor instead of the viewfinder The Icon A icon M 49 indicates that movies can not be recorded Live view switch Before Recording Set aperture before recording in mode Aor M Note that movies may be over or under exposed at some aperture settings Before shooting check the brightness of the scene in the monitor if the picture is too bright or too dark end live view and adjust aperture as necessary 2 Choose a focus mode Choose a focus mode as described in Step 2 of Live View M 50 Using an External Microphone The built in microphone may record lens noise during autofocus or vibration reduction This can be prevented by using a commercially available external microphone with a stereo mini pin jack 3 5 mm diameter External microphones can also be used to record in stereo 3 Choose an AF area mode See Step 3 on page 50 for more information 57 58 4 Focus lt Gu Frame the op
91. the selected folder File Naming MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs are saved using file names consisting of DSC_ or in the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space _DSC followed by a four digit number and a three letter extension e g DSC_0001 JPG The File naming option is used to select three letters to replace the DSC portion of the file name For information on editing file names see page 137 Note that the portion of the name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long Extensions The following extensions are used NEF for NEF RAW images JPG for JPEG images MOV for movies and NDF for dust off reference data In each pair of photographs recorded at image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG the NEF and JPEG images have the same file names but different extensions 204 Auto Distortion Control MENU button gt O shooting menu Select On to reduce barrel distortion when shooting with wide PEro angle lenses and to reduce pin cushion distortion when shooting with long lenses note that the edges of the area visible in the viewfinder may be cropped out of the final photograph and that the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase This option is recommended only with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded results are not guaranteed with other lenses Retouch Distortion
92. the shutter release button halfway to focus the camera With the camera in focus use the diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the viewfinder If necessary viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using optional corrective lenses QU 281 Basic Photography and Playback Point and Shoot Photography a and amp Modes This section describes how to take photographs in gm auto mode an automatic point and shoot mode in which the majority of settings are controlled by the camera in response to shooting conditions and in which the flash will fire automatically if the subject is poorly lit To take photographs with the flash off while leaving the camera in control of other settings rotate the mode dial to to select auto flash off mode Step 1 Turn the Camera On 1 Turn the camera on Remove the lens cap and turn the camera on The control panel will turn on and the display in the viewfinder will light 2 Check the battery level Check the battery level in the control panel or viewfinder Control panel Description Battery fully charged Battery partially discharged amp Low battery Charge battery or ready spare battery JO bli al al E CE 3 blinks blinks Shutter release disabled Charge or exchange battery No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5a AC adapter appears in information disp
93. to the computer the PC connection indicator Ff will appear in the control panel 181 Printing Photographs To print selected JPEG pictures on a PictBridge printer via a direct USB connection follow the steps below Take photographs Select photographs for printing using Print set DPOF Q 189 Connect camera to printer see below Print multiple photographs Q 185 Create index prints Q 188 Print photographs one at a time Q 183 Disconnect USB cable Printing Via Direct USB Connection Be sure the EN EL15 battery is fully charged or use an optional EH 5a AC adapter and EP 5B power connector When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB connection set Color space to sRGB 1 141 Connecting the Printer Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Connect the USB cable Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the printer do not connect the cable via a USB hub 182 3 Turn the camera on A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor followed by a PictBridge playback display PictBridge i 100D7000 15 04 2010 Printing Pictures One ata Time 1 Selecta picture Press lt or P to view additional pictures or press
94. tuning on On Off e Off Turn AF tuning off Move focal Tune AF for the current lens CPU lenses only point away Current sateita Press A or W to choose a value between 20and from camera value 20 Values for up to 12 lens types can be stored E AF fine tune Only one value can be stored for each type of lens ai F3 5 5 6 VR a No EE Choose the AF tuning value used when no Adust GRO Default previously saved value exists for the current lens Wave fecal Proviaus CPU lenses only point toward value camera List previously saved AF tuning values If a value exists for the current lens it will be shown with a 1 icon To delete a lens from the list highlight the desired lens and press To change a lens identifier for example to choose an identifier that is the same as the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value can be used List saved With only one lens of each type highlight the desired lens and press values The menu shown at right will be displayed press Aor W PEET Choose lens number to choose an identifier and press to save changes and Repel exit g F3 5 5 6 VR No a tA W01 ie v 00 99 Set OKOK AF Tuning The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when AF tuning is applied m Live View Tuning is not applied to autofocus during in live view M 49 Saved Value
95. turn Eye Fi cards on and off but may not support other Eye Fi functions Supported Eye Fi Cards As of June 2010 the following Eye Fi cards can be used 2 GB SD cards in the Share Home and Explore product categories 4 GB SDHC cards in the Anniversary Share Video Explore Video and Connect X2 product categories and 8 GB SDHC cards in the Pro X2 and Explore X2 product categories Eye Fi cards are for use only in the country of purchase Be sure the Eye Fi card firmware has been updated to the latest version Firmware Version MENU button gt Setup menu View the current camera firmware version 247 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies To display the retouch menu press MENU and select the gh retouch menu tab MENU button Ia RETOUCH MENU e D Lighting z Red eye correction a RETOUCH MENU mal D Lighting mea z Red eye correction Trim Monochrome Filter effects AEE Color balance Image overlay Image overlay El NEF RAW processing El NEF RAW processing The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed or retouched copies of existing pictures The retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing photographs is inserted in the camera Option aa Option AA EF D Lighting 251 a Straighten 261 Red eye correction 251 C9 Distortion control 261 X Trim 252 Fk Fisheye 261 Ci Monochrome 253 LY Color outline 262 Q Filter effects 254 EY Color sk
96. use the PictBridge Time stamp option The Print set DPOF option can not be used if there is not enough space on the memory card to store the print order NEF RAW photographs M 85 can not be selected using this option JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu QO 258 Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a computer or other device after the print order is created Viewing Photographs on TV The supplied EG D2 audio video A V cable can be used to connect the camera to a television or video recorder for playback or recording A type C mini pin High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI cable available separately from third party suppliers can be used to connect the camera to high definition video devices Standard Definition Devices Before connecting the camera to a standard television confirm that the camera video standard M 237 matches that used in the TV 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting the A V cable 2 Connect the A V cable as shown Connect to a video device Si lt Connect to camera 3 Tune the television to the video channel 4 Turn the camera on and press the gt button During playback image will be displayed both in the camera monitor and on the television screen Note that the edges of images may not be displayed 191
97. using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains from the lens apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and wipe the lens carefully See The Low Pass Filter A 284 286 for information on cleaning the low pass filter Do not touch the shutter curtain The shutter curtain is extremely thin and easily damaged Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on the curtain poke it with cleaning tools or subject it to powerful air currents from a blower These actions could scratch deform or tear the curtain 289 Storage To prevent mold or mildew store the camera in a dry well ventilated area If you are using an AC adapter unplug the adapter to prevent fire If the product will not be used for an extended period remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic bag containing a desiccant Do not however store the camera case in a plastic bag as this may cause the material to deteriorate Note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals To prevent mold or mildew take the camera out of storage at least once a month Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before putting it away Store the battery in a cool dry place Replace the terminal cover before putting the battery away Notes on the monitor The monitor may contain a few pixels that are
98. value for white balance will be stored in preset d 0 automatically replacing the previous value for this preset no confirmation dialog will be displayed A thumbnail will be displayed in the preset white balance list N 126 To use the new value for white balance select preset d 0 if no value has been measured for white balance before d 0 is selected white balance will be set to a color temperature of 5 200 K the same as Direct sunlight The new white balance value will remain in preset d 0 until white balance is measured again By copying preset d 0 to one of the other presets before measuring a new value for white balance up to five white balance values can be stored M 126 125 EE Copying White Balance from d 0 to Presets d 1 d 4 Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white balance from d 0 to any of the other presets d 1 d 4 1 Select PRE Preset manual Press the MENU button and select White GS White balance i g Incandescent balance in the shooting menu Highlight Eg 3 Fuorescet Preset manual and press P U 2 Cloudy E Shade 4 Choose color temp 2i PRE Preset manual gt 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 f6 E White balance and press Qe ye d 1 PRE Select RSet 3 Copy d 0 to the selected preset E White balance Highlight Copy d 0 and press 8 If Onn comment has been created for d 0 M 129 vi set the comment wi
99. view 35mm format Angle of view D7000 Optional Flash Units Speedlights The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS and can be used with CLS compatible flash units Optional flash units can be attached directly to the camera accessory shoe as described below The accessory shoe is equipped with a safety lock for flash units with a locking pin such as the SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB 400 1 Remove the accessory shoe cover 2 Mount the flash unit on the accessory shoe See the manual provided with the flash unit for details The built in flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached The AS 15 Sync Terminal Adapter When the AS 15 sync terminal adapter available separately is mounted on the camera accessory shoe flash accessories can be connected via a sync terminal M Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories Use only Nikon flash units Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Before using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section contact a Nikon authorized service representative for more information 275 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Nikon s advanced Creative Lighting System CLS offers improved communication between the camera and compatible flash units for improved flash photography EE CLS Compatible Flash
100. when photographing subjects that are moving quickly and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder e g birds e 3D tracking Select the focus point as described on page 96 In AF A and AF C focus modes the camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point and select new focus points as required Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the selected focus point 3D tracking When the shutter release button is pressed halfway the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera Consequently 3D tracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the frame 94 e Auto areaAF The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point If a type G or D lens is used the camera can distinguish human subjects from the background for improved subject detection The active focus points are highlighted briefly after the camera focuses in AF C mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected in AF A mode the main focus point remains highlighted after the other focus points have turned off To select the AF area mode press the AF mode button and rotate the sub command dial until the desire
101. will be displayed Highlight Yes and press to save the resized copies Viewing Resized Copies Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed Image Quality Copies created from NEF RAW or NEF RAW JPEG photos have an image quality M 85 of JPEG fine copies created from JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original 260 Quick Retouch MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create copies with enhanced saturation and contrast Quick retouch D Lighting is applied as required to brighten dark or backlit subjects Press A or W to choose the amount of enhancement The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the cancel Zoom Sae photograph Straighten MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a straightened copy of the selected image Press to rotate the image clockwise by up to five degrees in increments of approximately 0 25 degrees q to rotate it counterclockwise note that edges of the image will be trimmed to create a square copy Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Distortion Control MENU button gt g retouch menu Create copies with reduced peripheral distortion Select Auto to let the camera correct distortion automatically and then make fine adjustments using the multi selector or select Manual to reduce distortion manually note that Auto is not available with photos taken using auto distortio
102. with an MB D11 the EP 5B must be inserted into the MB D11 not the camera Do not attempt to use the camera with power connectors inserted into both the camera and MB D11 Wireless Transmitter WT 4 Connects the camera to wireless and Ethernet networks The photographs on the camera memory card can be viewed by computers on the same network or copied to a computer for long term storage be sure to always use the latest version of the software supplied with the WT 4 The camera can also be controlled from any computer on the network using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Note that the WT 4 requires an independent power source an EH 6 AC adapter or EN EL3e battery is recommended See the WT 4 manual for details Filters intended for special effects photography may interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder The D7000 can not be used with linear polarizing filters Use C PL or C PL II circular polarizing filters instead NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens To prevent ghosting use of a filter is not recommended when the subject is framed against a bright light or when a bright light source is in the frame Center weighted metering is recommended with filters with exposure factors filter factors over 1 x Y44 Y48 Y52 O56 R60 XO X1 C PL ND2S ND4 ND4S ND8 ND8S ND400 A2 A12 B2 B8 B12 See the filter manual for details Viewfinder eyepiece accessories Software Body cap Remote con
103. with an aperture ring M 269 lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring Non CPU lenses can only be used in modes A aperture priority auto and M manual when aperture can only be adjusted using the lens aperture ring Selecting any other mode disables the shutter release Shutter Speed and Aperture The same exposure can be achieved with different combinations of shutter soeed and aperture Fast shutter speeds and large apertures freeze moving objects and soften background details while slow shutter speeds and small apertures blur moving objects and bring out background details Shutter speed Aperture 125 Fast shutter speed Slow shutter speed Large aperture f 3 1 600S 15s Remember the higher the f number the smaller the aperture 67 Mode P Programmed Auto In this mode the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure in most situations This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture To take photographs in programmed auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to P Mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot Flexible Program In mode P different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main command dial while the exposure meters are on flexible program Rotate
104. 09 PSAM gt O 100 Picture Control settings Unmodified 131 Autofocus viewfinder Flash compensation 0 148 91 Exposure compensation 0 107 AF area mode Flash mode 2 9 14 2 m Single point AF Default Center o Mi ISO sensitivity Active D Lighting 139 Unmodified 39 point dynamic area AF A Other shooting modes Autofocus live view movie 0 AF area mode Bi Normal area AF 50 vm 94 e Ay 1 Focus point not displayed if auto area AF is selected for AF area mode 2 Current Picture Control only 151 152 Multiple Exposure P S A and M Modes Only Follow the steps below to record a series of two or three exposures in a single photograph Multiple exposures can be recorded at any image quality setting and make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor to produce colors noticeably superior to those in software generated photographic overlays BE Creating a Multiple Exposure Multiple exposures can not be recorded in live view Exit live view before proceeding Note that at default settings shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are performed for 30 s Extended Recording Times For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s select On for the Image review M 200 option in the playback menu and extend the monitor off delay for image review using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay Q 215 The maximum interval between expos
105. 192 Video Mode If no image is displayed check that camera is correctly connected and that the option selected for Video mode M 237 matches the video standard used in the TV Television Playback Use of an EH 5a AC adapter and EP 5B power connector available separately is recommended for extended playback Slide Shows The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated playback M 201 Audio When a movie with sound recorded in stereo using an external microphone is viewed on a television connected to the camera via an A V cable the audio output is monaural HDMI connections support stereo output Volume can be adjusted using television controls the camera controls can not be used Close the Connector Cover Close the camera connector cover when the connectors are not in use Foreign matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer High Definition Devices The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C mini pin HDMI cable available separately from third party suppliers 1 Turn the camera off Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable 2 Connect the HDMI cable as shown Connect to high definition device choose cable with connector for HDMI device Connect to camera 3 Tune the device to the HDMI channel 4 Turn the camera on and press the gt button During playback images will be displayed on the high definition
106. 220 221 235 242 280 MB D11 battery type 220 Medium Image size e 88 Memory buffer 38 79 Memory card 29 32 236 319 320 Memory card capacity 6 320 Metering sess essesesesseessesseessresressees 105 MicrOPhON cccsesseseeeeeeees 4 57 60 Microphone Movie settings 60 Miniature effect uu eecsecseseseees 263 Minimum aperture 4 26 67 Mired esmines nanen 121 MITOV gece esterase leeatectencades 80 83 286 Mirror Up essesssssessessessessessessees 7 77 83 Mode dialisis 6 Modeling flash cccsessecseseseees 228 MONItOP esseceeeee 46 49 163 237 Monitor COVET sssssscecssscscsrseseres 17 Monitor off delay cscseceeees 215 Monitor pre flash 0 146 149 MONOCHLOME eseseesesesssecseceesseeee 253 Monochrome Set Picture Control 131 MOUNTING MaLK esseseeeeeeeesees 25 Movie quality Movie settings 60 MOVIE settings s sssesssessessesssessessee 60 Movie record button sceeee 58 MOVIES 2c5meecusnencnemecus 57 Multiple xpOSsure ecsseseees 152 My MenU ssssessesssesssessessesssessesssesseese 265 N NEF vieiis 85 87 204 NEF RAW scssessssessseeees 85 87 258 NEF RAW bit depth 87 NEF RAW processing 258 NEF RAW recording scseceee 87 Neutral Set Picture Control 131 Nikon Transfer 2 000 179 180 Non CPU lens eee 159 270 Non CPU lens data 159 Number of
107. 264 Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu M 200 photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s after shooting because the camera is already in the correct orientation images are not rotated automatically during image review In continuous release mode display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed 163 164 To Description View additional Press to view photographs in order recorded lt to view photographs photographs in reverse order View photo Press A or W to view information about current photograph information CO 165 View thumbnails See page 171 for more information Zoom in on photograph Q See page 173 for more information Delete images m Confirmation dialog will be displayed Press f again to delete photo Change protect Yon To protect image or to remove protection from protected status image press on M 174 Return to ve Go Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken shooting mode ZN immediately Display menus MENU See page 195 for more information Create retouched copy of current photograph M 248 If current picture is marked with icon to show that it is a movie pressing starts movie playback M 62 Retouch photo or play movie Choosing a Memory Card Slot If two memory cards are inserted you can select a card for playback by holding the BKT button and p
108. 282 IEJ CPU contacts BUD Lene MOU ssip 25 100 K Tripod socket BEE BODY Cap essensen 25 281 The Camera Body Continued rin ave unustlll q nt mai Ww a as tea FORMAT 1 Viewfinder CY PieCe scsessssssssssscssssssessecseeseeseees 81 Q playback ZOOM in button ues 173 EEJ Rubber eyecUp sanovan 81 QUAL image quality size button 86 88 tt delete button Two button reset button ssssssssessssssserssessseesssss 151 Deleting PiCtUres ceccscsssecssessseessscsseessseesseeesees 47 10 Diopter adjustment Control ssssssssssssssesreeesesssss 34 Deleting pictures during playback 175 G RE AE L AF L Dutton cesssssseesneen 97 106 232 nm format button ssessssssseessssseeessssseesssssseeensens L 12 o a sore sereneesserecte erent 62 gt playback DUON sssini 46 163 FEY Main command dial sssssssessesssesnseenseen 13 233 Monitor LIVE view SWITCH ceessssescsssssessssecssssseesssseesssseees 49 57 Viewing Settings ss ssesseesseessessoessesseessessessreserseeesees 10 E Movie record Dutton wiscinmcienncuteaeesse 58 LIVE VIEW ssssssssssssrsssrsrssessrsrsesssrsrsrernrsrnrernrneneees 49 57 BUD Multi SOLS CON sss 19 Viewing PICTULS sseesssssssesssessssssseesssesseresseessesss 46 Memory card slot COVE ssssssssssesssesstessistsete 29 Full frame playback woven 1 18 OK button s ssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssreseeeerseessesesses 19 J VENU
109. 50 s 1 250 s 1 60s Flash sync speed set to selected value Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in mode S or M select the next shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed 30 s or bulb An X flash sync indicator will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder Auto FP High Speed Sync Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight The information display flash mode indicator shows FP when auto FP high speed sync is active Q 278 222 EE Flash Control at 1 320 s Auto FP When 1 320 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 222 the built in flash can be used at shutter speeds as fast as 1 320 s while optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB R200 flash units can be used at any shutter speed Auto FP High Speed Sync Flash sync speed 1 320 s Auto FP 1 250 s Auto FP 1 250s Built in flash dare Built in flash A Built in flash Optionalflash Shutter speed ni 3 000 320 S EE n EA 320 250 S rsh sync Sen 250 30 s Flash sync Flash range drops as shutter speed increases Flash range will nevertheless be greater than that obtained at the same speeds with Auto FP I The Flash Ready Indicator When the flash fires at full power the
110. 63 66 LO 18 20 27 238 13 16 215 34 53 216 245 27 237 32 236 151 202 207 18 305 LO 179 181 182 190 184 190 LO 319 269 275 280 281 81 283 Table of Contents CB ION csc cos tot ansceesa A A T A E aaraientracete ii FOR VUE SAR OU cc sssscactonnecheeveelaoe tresses aad ansnatiesetanacesnts O a xii OEP TA TO E E E EEE E A A S XIV Introduction 1 SU arctan ce ccc ceca ce E O A eect OE seems E 1 GeTLING TO KNOW the CaMeP cssssssssssssssessscsesssssssscscscssssssesesesescsesessssesesesesesesseseeeseseseesees 2 The Camera BOOY rissies aa aE EErEE EE 2 UMS PONS TNA AAE E E E AA E E E E 6 The Release Mode Dial sssscscsscscsssecscescecsssecscnscesassecacsecsasscacsscscassecacsscscassucasssessaencees 7 The COT ON Panel ssia earn SEREA AEAEE EE ante 8 The VIS WAIN GY ces ccviscecdances thes vusidoes vevtncavanspdavdessesenonnsdaen vtvesvacssbons usaivdasowseasedasetecopbnspsosasens coevenst 9 The information DIS DIAY ssaccsusesses suasicessvsvscietostseparenaaeassonscasvactcassoukbootseeyansedsonteskavsntenstesteesdes 10 The Command 8 aeneeneee enema rer tte rarest ener ertarart te rrer rn arsenate seers 13 The BM 11 Monitor COVEN isc cteasacparcterccestcnstece nets eseniiany acetanilide 17 Camera MenUS seas heecs cc cc ta st cec ect cece su cece aidaa case fase a Ania arinaa ridiani 18 RS TPC ASN eS NS aa cess ece cece tas cence cee E decease 19 PESE SS E T E een uaciassuoe sete sane na
111. 7 BE Fn button assignment nner 230 Flash compensation value ssssssssssssssssssseeeees 148 AE L AF L button assignment ssvereseeneeneeree 232 Number of shots in bracketing sequence KE Picture Control indicator sssesssesssesssenssens 132 seein aeececeasios 109 112 114 J Long exposure noise reduction indicator 205 Focal length non CPU lenses cseeseeseeeees 159 Auto distortion control ws esscscscseesseseseees 205 Color temperature ss essesessssessesessssosssecssseessseessse 122 White balance ess sssssssssesssssessseecssseesssecessecesssees 117 5 Color temperature indicator ccecseeseseeeeeees 122 k White balance fine tuning indicator 120 i Aperture Stop Indicator csesesseseeeseeen 70 270 H IMAGE quality a mearain 85 TA Aperture f number s s ss1sss1s11ss1ssrssrosrorrsrs se 70 71 Role played by card in slot 2 0 0 89 Aperture number of Stops w ssssessssssseees 70270 PA AGG iian 88 Bracketing increment ssssscsssssecsssseeessseees 110112 Af Hashi MOG ssis 144 Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 159 10 44 22 23 MB D11 battery type display occ 220 ape K leer ai 4 MB D11 battery indicator EE A 221 ae td aac EJ GPS connec On OIC OCOl esms 162 He abt M EO Metern gucacsnisnen niaaa 105 I a 31 Depth of field preview button assignment 232 32 kao o1 ACG N eee antonio 141 EE Active D Lighting indicator ssssssesssesseenee 139 High ISO
112. 700 or SU 800 as commander and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 as remotes Auto FP high speed sync and modeling illumination supported with all CLS compatible flash units except SB 400 Flash Color Information Communication and FV lock supported with all CLS compatible flash units AS 15 sync terminal adapter available separately Auto 2 types incandescent fluorescent 7 types direct sunlight flash cloudy shade preset manual up to 5 values can be stored choose color temperature 2500 K 10000 K all with fine tuning Live view Lens servo AF area mode Autofocus Movie Metering Metering method Frame size pixels and me frame rate PAL Maximum length File format Video compression Audio recording format Audio recording device Monitor Monitor Playback Playback Interface USB Video output HDMI output Accessory terminal Audio input Supported languages Supported languages e Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S full time servo AF AF F e Manual focus M Face priority AF wide area AF normal area AF subject tracking AF Contrast detect AF anywhere in frame camera selects focus point automatically when face priority AF or subject tracking AF is selected TTL exposure metering using main image sensor Matrix e 1 920 x 1 080 24p 24 23 976 fos e 1 280 x 720 30p 30 29 97 fps e 1 280 x 720 24p 24 23 976 fos 640 x 424 30p 30 29 97 fps
113. 8 that the battery has reached the end of its charging life and should be replaced Note that batteries charged at temperatures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary drop in charging life the battery age display will however return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher The MB D11 Battery Pack The display for the MB D11 battery pack is shown at right If AA batteries are used the battery level will be shown by a battery level icon other items will not be displayed rp Battery info MB D11 88 D7000 _ Bat meter 89 Y Pic meter 209 143 G 5 es 0 0 te g He 2 K Done Copyright Information MENU button gt Y Setup menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information is visible on the fourth shooting data page in the photo information display M 169 and can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 supplied or in Capture NX 2 available separately Q 281 e Done Save changes and return to the setup menu e Artist Enter a photographer name as described on page 137 Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long e Copyright Enter the name of the copyright holder as described on page 137 Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters long e Attach copyright information Select this option to attach PEME copyright information to all subsequent photographs Done Attach copyright information can be tu
114. A Reset shooting menu using the Image size option in Fy Storage folder 100 the shooting menu 2 202 y Filenaming osc lt Role played by card in Slot2 O mage quality NORM 4 JPEG compression is kl NEF RAW recording l QUAL button Sub command dial Control panel Using Two Memory Cards When two memory cards are inserted in the camera you can use the Role played by card in Slot 2 item in the shooting menu to choose the role played by the card in Slot 2 Choose from Overflow the card in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is full Backup each picture is recorded twice once to the card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2 and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 as for Backup except that the NEF RAW copies of photos recorded at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1 and the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2 Backup and RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card with the least amount of memory Shutter release will be disabled when either card is full Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera the slot used to record movies can be selected using the Movie settings gt Destination option in the shooting menu M 60 89 90 Focus This section describes the focus options available when photographs are framed in the viewfinder Focus can be adjusted automatically see below
115. California WARNING Handling the cord on this product may expose you to lead a chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or other reproductive harm Wash hands after handling Nikon Inc 1300 Walt Whitman Road Melville New York 11747 3064 U S A Tel 631 547 4200 XV xvi Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced by means of a scanner digital camera or other device may be punishable by law e Items prohibited by law from being copied or e Cautions on certain copies and reproductions reproduced Do not copy or reproduce paper money coins securities government bonds or local government bonds even if such copies or reproductions are stamped Sample The copying or reproduction of paper money coins or securities which are circulated in a foreign country is prohibited Unless the prior permission of the government has been obtained the copying or reproduction of unused postage stamps or post cards issued by the government is prohibited The copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary
116. Control For information on creating copies of existing photographs with reduced barrel and pin cushion distortion see page 261 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction MENU button gt K shooting menu If On is selected photographs taken at shutter speeds slower than 8 s will be processed to reduce noise randomly spaced bright pixels or fog increasing the time required to record Gti images by roughly 1 5 to 2 times During processing dan nr will blink in the shutter soeed aperture displays and pictures can not be taken if the camera is turned off before processing is car a complete the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed In continuous release mode frame rates will slow and while photographs are being processed the capacity of the memory buffer will drop High ISO NR MENU button gt shooting menu Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to reduce noise Tariana Option Description HIGH High Reduce noise randomly spaced bright pixels lines or fog particularly in NORM Normal photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities Choose the amount of noise LOW Low reduction performed from High Normal and Low Noise reduction is only performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO 1600 and higher Off The amount of noise reduction is less than the amount performed when Low is selected for High ISO NR 205 G Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Set
117. F RAW images can be viewed on the camera or using software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Q 281 or ViewNX 2 available on the supplied ViewNX 2 CD JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu M 258 Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF RAW images NEF JPEG When photographs taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are viewed on the camera with only one memory card inserted only the JPEG image will be displayed If both copies are recorded to the same memory card both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted If the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the Role played by card in Slot 2 gt RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 option deleting the JPEG copy will not delete the NEF RAW image 87 88 Image Size Image size is measured in pixels Choose from the following options Image size Print size cm in Large 41 7 X 27 6 16 4 x 10 9 Im Medium 31 3 x 20 7 12 3 x 8 2 f Small 20 9 x 13 8 8 2 x 5 4 Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi Print size in inches equals image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch approximately 2 54 cm Image size is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel The Shooting Menu Image size can also be adjusted a SHOOTING MENU
118. IONG OMEN leccce a e ccactoes che neko te ia eaact near ea ieabeen na ula cnetateess 261 FUSING Orana ea A A ania meatal ante nnnteatae 261 COlO Fe OUCIINe iashetes wetecs cae eet T AASS 262 COIR SOU Carter eer ee ere tei chee acre aioe aaa eens 262 Perspective Control si cesescesccessaeccrasicatscestessacecedeeaensuiuiessasdacsssuseubvar N A 263 Miniature ETT CCE esses essissxchuacestace n KE A ARESA 263 Side Dy side Compari SON aa E NN 264 My Menu E Recent Settings cccessessessessessessessecssssssssssscssessesscescsecesceneeseeseeseeseesees 265 Recent SOU CS rasa E a cates 268 Technical Notes 269 Compatible Lense Saronni SAA Optional Flash Units Speedlights ssesosesseossesseessesssessesssesseessesseesecoseeseesseossesseossesse The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS s s seseesssessseessseesseessseesnsessseeosseesseesnseossee Other ACCESSOrIES ssssssssssssscssssssesssesesscsesescsesesessssesesesesessssesescacsesesseseseseacaeseseeseseseacseesess Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter CAI FOV CIE CIME d sczcascincszssiezsascaseasstetaes caavseitdsiaitsaveavenndsavesastetatorastatandieiteannieadiadsaiseoees C8 fo 2 ene ne eae E eee eee eee ee FM NMA aces E E E FE E TA us EEE A E E he vee The Low Pass Filter s seseesssessesossersseessreossneosserssseosseossneosseronseonseoosnrosserssseossseonsreosneessees Clean NOW seasan E ia ai Clean at Stant up Shutdown soressssgi n in e A
119. MOOG araa E 91 Number of shots remaining before memory Aperture f number s sssssesssereserssesesssssesssssss 70 71 buffer fills sscdsesessveciwenavieoenidwweeweaceoaiivataveeteesees 38 79 F Aperture number of Stops csccessesseeees 70 270 ISO SE MSIUIV nenna 101 GE Low battery warning sss 35 Preset white balance recording indicator 124 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 109 Exposure compensation value sccecseeseeseees 107 WB bracketing indicator csesecssecssssessseeessseen 112 Flash compensation value sssesssssseenseesseen 148 ADL bracketing indicator s s 1911911911011011011 114 Active D Lighting AMOUNT 139 B ISO sensitivity indicatOr scsssssssseuesesueuereeee 101 AF area mode cscessecsscsscsssesssessssssessecsscasesseseseesees 94 L1 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 CXPOSULES cccccsecscsssssessssecscssssessseeecessees 36 Display can be turned off with Custom Setting d4 M No Battery When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted the display in the viewfinder will dim This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fully charged battery is inserted The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and the response times of the displays may drop at low temperatures This is normal and doe
120. N SOO eeoact tee Peers 105 Exposure compensation 107 Flexible Program uu 68 Live VIEW decstsnsssnsnnaretns 49 57 E INFO DUTTON eeceseeseeee 10 12 WB White balance seeeee 117 PRE Preset manual 117 123 BKT bracketing 0 109 164 dalee E E 18 Focus indicator 38 97 100 Memory buffer 00 38 79 4 Flash ready indicator 39 SWitCh sseesssssssssseesssssssssceeesessssssee 229 Numerics 122 0 Gueranennereer eric un ener nen errs 87 14 bit cise bean 87 2 016 pixel RGB sensot 00 310 3D tracking wisssurssstennstswvsinns 94 95 A AC adapter c esssesseseseeeeees 280 282 PCCOSSONGS tures cetae ines 280 Accessory terminal ccscceceees 281 Active D Lighting 114 139 Add items My Menu 00 265 ADL bracketing ecseee 114 229 Adobe RGB seieistniatimvannvemtnns 141 AE amp flash Auto bracketing set 109 229 AE 1lOCK mcnuiemianusenmumnid 106 229 PEE EE EA EEE 106 AE L AF L button 97 106 232 AF ssinsehdentinersatasavesinvaviavaningiast 50 91 98 AF area bracket ccscseceesesees 9 34 AF FING tUNG ccsesessecseestsseesseseeseens 246 AF point illumination 0 209 AF Aeae nE 91 AF area MOCE ccsecsssssseeseeseees 50 94 AF area mode Live view movie AP E E E 50 AF aSS St senseeesesssesssesseessesse0 273 279 r a EEE 91 208 AF C prio
121. Picture Controls to or from the Gs Manage Picture Control memory card or to delete custom Picture Controls from the memory card highlight Load save in the E Manage Picture Control menu and press The Fen following options will be displayed e Copy to camera Copy custom Picture Controls from the memory card to custom Picture Controls C 1 through C 9 on the camera and name them as desired e Delete from card Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the memory card The confirmation PERET dialog shown at right will be displayed before a MONOCHRONE 02 Picture Control is deleted to delete the selected Picture Control highlight Yes and press 68 e Copy to card Copy a custom Picture Control C 1 through C 9 from the camera to a selected destination 1 through 99 on the memory card OK Saving Custom Picture Controls Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at any one time The memory card can only be used to store user created custom Picture Controls The preset Picture Controls supplied with the camera can not be copied to the memory card renamed or deleted The options in the Manage Picture Control menu apply only to the memory card in Slot 1 Custom Picture Controls can not be deleted from or copied to or from the card in Slot 2 138 Active D Lighting P S A and M Modes Only Active D Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows creating photographs with natur
122. Save 254 Color Balance MENU button gt gh retouch menu Use the multi selector to create a copy with modified color balance as shown below The effect is displayed in the monitor together with red green and blue histograms M 167 giving the distribution of tones in the copy Increase amount of green Kae Create retouched copy Increase amount of blue 4 ey Increase amount of magenta B Increase amount of amber Zoom To zoom in on the image displayed in the monitor press the amp button The histogram will be updated to show data only for the portion of the image displayed in the monitor While the image is zoomed in press the button to toggle back and forth between color balance and zoom When zoom is selected you can zoom in and out with the amp and amp 2 buttons and scroll the image with the multi selector 255 Image Overlay MENU button gt gh retouch menu Image overlay combines two existing NEF RAW photographs to create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals the results which make use of RAW data from the camera image sensor are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging application The new picture is saved at current image quality and size settings before creating an overlay set image quality and size M 85 88 all options are available To create a NEF RAW copy choose an image quality of NEF RAW 1 Select Image overlay E imase over
123. Shooting During interval timer photography the icon inthe control panel mza will blink Immediately before the next shooting interval begins the shutter speed display will show the number of intervals remaining and the aperture display will show the number of shots remaining in the current interval At other times the number of intervals remaining and the number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway once the button is released the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off To view current interval timer settings select Interval timer Interval timer shooting shooting between shots While interval timer photography is in O Tn progress the interval timer menu will show the starting time the shooting interval and the number of intervals and shots remaining FELSEDIE None of these items can be changed while interval timer Secu photography is in progress E Move OSet 13 44 Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress The monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each interval 157 158 EE Pausing Interval Timer Photography Interval timer photography can be paused by e Highlighting Start gt Pause in the interval timer menu and pressing e Turning the camera off and then on again if desired the memory card can be
124. T EREE Coordinated Universal Time UTC as reported by the GP 1 Sj nes Altitude 15m UTC 15 04 2010 01 26 13 e Use GPS to set camera clock Select Yes to synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the GPS device Coordinated Universal Time UTC UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera clock The Icon Connection status is shown by the GB icon e static Camera has established communication with GP 1 Photo information for pictures taken while this icon is displayed include an additional page of GPS data M 169 flashing The GP 1 is searching for a signal Pictures taken while the icon is flashing do not include GPS data No icon No new GPS data have been received from the GP 1 for at least two seconds Pictures taken when the icon is not displayed do not include GPS data 162 More on Playback Full Frame Playback To play photographs back press the gt button gt button The most recent photograph will be displayed in the monitor 1 100D7000 DSC_0012 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 11 03 49 4928x3264 Multi selector Sub command dial T button gt button MENU button Yom button d Rotate Tall To display tall portrait orientation photographs in tall orientation select On for the Rotate tall option in the playback menu M 200 1 100D7000 DSC_0011 JPG 15 04 2010 10 06 27 4928x3
125. The WT 4 can be used in any of the following modes Mode Function Transfer mode Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp server Thumbnail select Preview photographs on computer monitor before upload mode PC mode Control camera from computer using Camera Control Pro 2 available separately Print mode Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network computer For more information see the WT 4 user s manual Be sure to update to the latest versions of the WT 4 firmware and supplied software Transfer Mode When the WT 4 is connected to the camera in transfer mode the picture currently displayed in full frame playback can be uploaded to the computer by pressing the BKT and buttons Movies The WT 4 can be used to upload movies in transfer mode if Auto send or Send folder is not selected for Transfer settings Movies can not be uploaded in thumbnail selector mode Recording and Viewing Movies During Transfer Movies can not be recorded or played back in image transfer mode when a WT 4 is connected to the camera image transfer mode applies when images are being transferred and when images remain to be sent Thumbnail Select Mode Camera settings can not be changed from the computer in thumbnail select mode Camera Control Pro 2 Camera Control Pro 2 software available separately can be used to control the camera from a computer When Camera Control Pro 2 is used to capture photographs directly
126. _0001 JPG NORMAL fi 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 10 02 27 1214928x3264 15 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 NIKON D7000 100 1 File information Overview data 2 y S A MTR SPD AP eo J EXP MODE ISO N a I a FOCAL LENGTH 35mm mS m o lt AF VR S VR On FLASH TYPE Built in CMD E SYNC MODE SLON A E K amp D Bene Gen T ae ik wel 0 0 I ES LEKA aSelect R G B iB R G B OSelect R G B 100 1 Highlights RGB histogram Shooting data pages 1 4 EE File Information a Protect Status ccsssscccscsssessscecsssssssessesssesssesesseeeees 174 2 Retouch indicator seeessssssssssesssssesccssccsssccesssceessees 248 E FOCUS Point A nnanenunaiinnnii a 96 AF area brackets Frame number total number of frames 6l File NAME ssssssssssssssseessssesssstcsssseesssseesssoesssstessseeesssees 204 IMAGE quality sss ssssssssssssssessssesssresssresssressresserreseresss 85 8 Image SZE reiua 88 4 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL l 15 04 2010 10 02 27 T14928x3264 9 Time Of recording e ecsesessessessesssscsseseeseeseees 27 237 10 9 10 Date of recording weccsssssssssssssssssssssessssssseenee 27 237 11 Current card Slot sssr 46 164 12 Folder name 203 1 Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Display mode 21 197 2 If photograph was taken using AF S or with single servo autofocus selected during AF A display shows point where focus first locked If
127. active focus point 3 Highlight active focus point or none Not used f 3 8 and information display 229 230 f3 Assign Fn Button MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the role played by the Fn button Ba AE i AF BKT Option Preview FV lock AE AF lock AE lock only AE lock Hold AF lock only Flash off Bracketing burst Active D Lighting NEF RAW Matrix metering Center weighted metering Description Press the Fn button to preview depth of field M 72 Press the Fn button to lock flash value built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units only Q 149 Press again to cancel FV lock Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed and remains locked until the button is pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn off Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn button is pressed If the Fn button is pressed while exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active in single frame or quiet shutter release mode all shots in the current bracketing program will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If white balance bracketing is active or continuous release mode mode CH or CL is selected the camera will repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter
128. after shooting See Also When ADL bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 229 the camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of shots See page 114 for more information Color Space The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color reproduction Choose a color space according to how photographs will be processed on leaving the camera Option Description Choose for photographs that will be printed or used as is with no further modification This color space is capable of expressing a wider gamut of colors than Adobe Adobe RGB sRGB making it the preferred choice for images that will be extensively processed or retouched sRGB sRGB 1 Select Color space MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button be Highlight Color space in the shooting menu and press gt vo Iso U SHOOTING MENU LEES AUTO1 A Set Picture Control ESD Manage Picture Control O Auto distortion control OFF sRGB T Active D Lighting OFF Long exp NR OFF EJ High ISO NR NORM aa 2 Select a color space E Color space Highlight the desired option and press W 5 Y 7 Adobe Adobe RGB 141 142 Color Space Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric values that represent them in a digital image file The sRGB color space is widely used while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used
129. al contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day It is most effective when used with matrix metering EJ Active D Lighting off Active D Lighting Active D Lighting EA Auto amp 4H High To use Active D Lighting 1 Select Active D Lighting MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button f 2 m SHOOTING MENU l Highlight Active D Lighting in the shooting CAC weed menu and press P Tito distortion contol A A Color space SRGB L OFF Long exp NR OFF en NORM 2 Choose an option E Active DLiahting Highlight an option and press W If SA mi A Auto r EA H Extra high E4 A Auto is selected the camera will Yi Hoh automatically adjust Active D Lighting as according to shooting conditions in mode _ M however E A Auto is equivalent to E N Normal 139 140 M Active D Lighting Noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines may appear in photographs taken with Active D Lighting Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects Active D Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 or above M Active D Lighting Versus D Lighting The Active D Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic range while the D Lighting option in the retouch menu QI 251 optimizes dynamic range in images
130. ame Thumbnail and Calendar Playback sessssssecsssesssssecsssessseseessseees 175 The Playpack WiC U scssssssscaircanecacorssesnonsssescemstavenreannicnne E 176 Vii viii Connections 179 Connecting to a COMPUTED sccsecssssssscssscscesecsssesosscscscscesecsseesesscasscacecssesessasscacscscees 179 Before Connecting the CaMera sssesssseesssseesssseessseeesseesosseeossseeonssressserosseeoosserossseesssee 179 Connecting the C AICS sins axceasesceevacisnucesicrasieaswus R RS 180 Wireless and Ethernet NetWworkS sssesssssessssersssseessseeessseeosssesssserossseessseressseeosseeossseeesss 181 Prining PIMOTCOGIAINS sararae ER 182 Connecting the Printer sseesesessseeesseesseessseeosseesseesnsesssseesseesseeosseeonseeosseessersnseosssrosseesseess 182 Printing PICTUVES One at a TIME icssirossisiiiisneriioisiaseniniasi a 183 Printing Multiple PiCtUreS essessseesssessssesssersseessseessseesseesseonseessseeosseesseessseoossrosseesseesseesss 185 Creating Index PriNTS asrasin ans a RSE EEES aS ii nAi EEEa 188 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set sese sssessseesssessssessseesseessserosseesseesneessseeosseesseese 189 Viewing Photographs on TV sisensssssesscrciaissastevssisicssisdiasdevsastecioneiwsenssenentwssdnateletasiesdanenaenies 191 Standard Definition De ViICES ssssssssssesssssssssssssesssssscsscsssessssscsscsscsseassessectecseensenseeces 191 High Definition Devices sssess
131. and the clock has been reset Set the clock to the correct time and date The Camera Clock The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and reset as necessary Insert a Memory Card The camera stores pictures on Secure Digital SD memory cards available separately Mm 319 The camera has two memory card slots Slot 1 and Slot 2 if you will be using only one memory card insert it in Slot 1 30 1 Turn the camera off a Inserting and Removing Memory Cards Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards 2 Open the card slot cover Slide the card slot cover out and open the card slot 3 Insert the memory card Holding the memory card as shown at right slide it in until it clicks into place The memory card access lamp will light for a few seconds M Inserting Memory Cards Inserting memory cards upside down or backwards could damage the camera or the card Check to be sure the card is in the correct orientation Close the memory card slot cover If this is the first time the memory card will be used in the camera or the card has been formatted in another device format the card as described on page 32 29 30 No Memory Card If no memory card is inserted the displays in the control panel and at the bottom of the viewfinder will show and a
132. ase Shutter release button button pressed halfway press the AE L AF L button to lock both focus and exposure an Sy AE L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder Focus will remain locked while the AE L AF L button is pressed even if you later remove your finger from the shutter release button AF S focus mode Focus will lock automatically e L button when the in focus indicator appears and remain AE L AF locked until you remove your finger from the shutter release button Focus can also be locked by pressing the AE L AF L button see above 97 3 Recompose the photograph and shoot Focus will remain locked between shots if you keep the shutter release button pressed halfway AF S or keep the AE L AF L button pressed allowing several photographs in succession to be taken at the same focus setting Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus lock is in effect If the subject moves focus again at the new distance See Also See Custom setting c1 Shutter release button AE L A 213 for information on using the shutter release button to lock exposure Custom Setting f5 Assign AE L AF L button M 232 for information on choosing the role played by the AE L AF L button 98 Manual Focus Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support autofocus non AF NIKKOR lenses or when the autofocus does not produce the desired results M 93 e AF S lense
133. ayed by card in Slot 2 89 Long exp NR 205 Image quality 85 High ISO NR 205 Image size 88 ISO sensitivity settings 101 JPEG compression 87 Multiple exposure 152 NEF RAW recording 87 Movie settings 60 White balance 117 Interval timer shooting 155 Set Picture Control 131 Remote control mode 80 Manage Picture Control 136 Note Depending on camera settings some items may be grayed out and unavailable For information on the options available in each shooting mode see page 292 Reset Shooting Menu MENU button gt shooting menu Select Yes to restore shooting menu options to their default GS Reset shooting menu values M 295 202 Storage Folder MENU button gt O shooting menu Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored EE Selecting Folders by Folder Number 1 Choose Select folder by number GS Storage folder a Select folder by number Highlight Select folder by number and press gt The dialog shown at right will be displayed 100 999 Move Set WOK 2 Choose a folder number Press lt or gt to highlight a digit press A or W to change If a folder with the selected number already exists a OG or El icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number e 4 Folder is empty e Folder is partially full e Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 No further pictures can be stored in this folder The card on which the folder is stored is shown by the card
134. battery e Battery can not be used e Contact Nikon authorized service representative a ca An extremely exhausted e Replace the battery or WAL blinks blinks rechargeable Li ion battery recharge the battery if the 24 or a third party battery is rechargeable Li ion battery inserted either in the camera is exhausted or in the optional MB D11 battery pack No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without Aperture value will be specifying maximum aperture displayed if maximum aperture Aperture shown in stops from is specified maximum aperture Camera unable to focus using Change composition or focus 93 99 blinks autofocus manually e No lens attached Attach non IX Nikkor lens 25 269 If a CPU lens is attached remove and reattach the lens e Non CPU lens attached Select mode A or M 270 Use a lower ISO sensitivity 101 paa blinks In shooting mode Subject too bright photo will P Use optional ND filter 280 be overexposed S Increase shutter speed 69 A Choose a smaller aperture 70 larger f number Vw pang ee 305 Indicator Control View panel Problem ae e Use a higher ISO sensitivity 101 e In shooting mode P Use flash 143 S Lower shutter speed 69 A Choose a larger aperture 70 smaller f number Ein E a Change shutter speed or select blinks tins by Selected in mode S mode M 69 71 e Change shutter speed or select blinks selected in mode S mo
135. by 2 016 pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambient background lighting If type G or D lens is used distance information is included when calculating flash output Precision of calculation can be increased for non CPU lenses by providing lens data focal length and maximum aperture see M 159 Not available when spot metering is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in frame to standard level brightness of background is not taken into account Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of background details or when exposure compensation is used Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot metering is selected The flash control mode for the built in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash N 223 The information display shows the flash control mode for the built in flash as follows Flash sync Auto FP Q 222 i TTL TTL Manual Repeating flash Commander mode 146 Aperture Sensitivity and Flash Range Flash range varies with sensitivity ISO equivalency and aperture Aperture at ISO equivalent of Range o 200 400 soo 1600 3200 6400 m k a 2 28 4 56 8 n ores zin zin 2 28 4 56 8 11 16 0660 2ft 19 Bin 28 4 56 B81 16 2 0642 2
136. by the lens while lenses that block the subject s view of the red eye reduction lamp may interfere with red eye reduction Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows The flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses The flash may be unable to light the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given below Lens Zoom position Minimum distance without vignetting AF S DX NIKKOR 10 24mm f 3 5 4 5G ED oa oe 20 24 mm No vignetting 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 20 24 mm No vignetting 24mm 2 0 m 6 ft 7 in AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR 28 mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 35mm No vignetting 20 mm 2 0 m 6 ft 7 in 24 35 mm No vignetting 24mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 28 55 mm No vignetting 18mm 1 0 m 3 ft 3 in 24 35 mm No vignetting AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 12 24mm f 4G IF ED AF S Zoom Nikkor 17 35 mm f 2 8D IF ED AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 17 55 mm f 2 8G IF ED AF Zoom Nikkor 18 35mm f 3 5 4 5D IF ED 271 272 Lens Minimum distance without vignetting AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200mm 3 5 5 6G IF ED 1 0m 3 ft 3 in AF S DX NIKKOR 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR Il 24 200 mm No vignetting AF S NIKKOR 24 70 mm 2 8G ED Poy No vignetting AF S Zoom Nikkor 28 70mm f 2 8D IF ED LO a No vignetting PC E NIKKOR 24mm f 3 5 ED No vignetting When not shifted or tilted When used with the AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED the flash will be unable to light the entire subject at all range
137. cable while transfer is in progress Windows To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2 select All Programs gt Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu Internet connection required 179 Connecting the Camera Connect the camera using the supplied UC E4 USB cable 1 Turn the camera off 2 Turnthe computer on Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up 3 Connect the USB cable Connect the USB cable as shown Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle M USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard 4 Turn the camera on 5 Transfer photographs a a oc After following the on screen instructions to I e a start Nikon Transfer 2 click Start Transfer to transfer photographs for more information on using Nikon Transfer 2 start ViewNX 2 or Nikon Transfer 2 and select ViewNX 2 Help from the Help menu Search For Start Transfer 6 Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when transfer ends Nikon Transfer 2 will close automatically when transfer is complete i 180 Wireless and Ethernet Networks If the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter M 280 is attached photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 available separately
138. camera and maximum aperture using Non CPU lens orientation data M 159 12 Use preset aperture In mode A set aperture 6 Can be used in mode Mat shutter speeds slower using focusing attachment before determining than flash sync speed by one step or more exposure and taking photograph 7 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with e PF 4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA 4 Camera shifting or tilting Holder 270 mM Incompatible Accessories and Non CPU Lenses The following accessories and non CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D7000 TC 16AS AF teleconverter Non Al lenses Lenses that require the AU 1 focusing unit 400mm f 4 5 600mm f 5 6 800mm f 8 1200mm f 11 Fisheye 6mm f 5 6 7 5mm f 5 6 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 2 1cm f 4 Extension Ring K2 180 600mm f 8 ED serial numbers 174041 174180 360 1200mm f 11 ED serial numbers 174031 174127 200 600mm f 9 5 serial numbers 280001 300490 AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED AF Teleconverter TC 16 PC 28mm f 4 serial number 180900 or earlier PC 35mm f 2 8 serial numbers 851001 906200 PC 35mm f 3 5 old type Reflex 1000mm f 6 3 old type Reflex 1000mm f 11 serial numbers 142361 143000 Reflex 2000mm f 11 serial numbers 200111 200310 V The Built in Flash The built in flash can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 16 300 mm although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast
139. cates the amount of blue the A value the amount of amber CO 119 BKT button Sub command dial Control panel The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are listed below Control panel Bracketing progress indicator No ofshots Increment Bracketing order a Se STA O e TAT OAT x m ee na 112 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program and each copy will have a different white balance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining the exposure count displays in the control panel and viewfinder will flash and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and m icon are no longer displayed White Balance Bracketing White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF RAW Selecting NEF RAW NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normal or NEF RAW JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display Q 119 No adjustments are made on the green magenta ax
140. cel 3 Choose Save selected frame Highlight Save selected frame and press Edit movie MC Choose start point JM Choose end point Save selected frame Cancel ff 01m30s 10m30s 4 Create a still copy Press A to create a still copy of the current frame 5 Save the copy Highlight Yes and press to create a JPEG copy of the selected frame Movie stills are indicated by a Micon in full frame playback PA eee Save Selected Frame JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not be retouched JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo information M 165 66 P S A and M Modes P S A and M modes offer different degrees of control over shutter speed and aperture Mode Description Programmed auto A 68 Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for P optimal exposure Recommended for snapshots and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust camera settings S Shutter priority auto 1 69 User chooses shutter speed camera selects aperture for best results Use to freeze or blur motion Aperture priority auto N 70 User chooses aperture camera selects A shutter speed for best results Use to blur background or bring both foreground and background into focus M Manual A 71 User controls both shutter speed and aperture Set shutter speed to bulb or time for long time exposures Lens Types When using a CPU lens equipped
141. ch indicator seesseessseesscrssecsseerssessseosseesee 248 A High ISO noise reduction uu 205 Long exposure NOISE reduction ececeeeeees 205 Active D Lighting seescssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseessseees 139 5 Retouch HiStOLY ccsssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssesess 248 6 IMAGE COMMENT oassssssssssssssssessssssssssssssstssssssseeeene 238 J Camera name 8 Folder number frame NUMbET ove 218 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode M 197 EE Shooting Data Page 4 12 ARTIST NIKON TARO COPYRIGHT NIKON 1 Protect StatUS sssesssosesssosseorocrssosrsssorrssesrisseossassnts 174 Retouch indicator ssse sssesesseessseesseessseeesseeessee 248 B Name of photographer s ss sssssseesssssessssesesssssee 243 Copyright holder sssssssessscsssssssssessessssssssssseeeeeen 243 E Camera name E Folder number frame NUMDE ssesssssssseees 218 6 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode M 197 and copyright information is appended to photograph M 243 HE GPS Data N 56 37T 43 139 43 696 35m 115 04 2010 10 02 27 ALTITUDE TIME UTC au A Ww a Protect Status cccssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssessssssssssssssseees 174 Z Retouch indicator issssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseees 248 B Latitude Longitude Altitude 6 Coordinated Universal Time UTC Camera name 8 Folder number frame NUMDEL uses 218 Displayed o
142. covered under warranty These glass elements are easily damaged Remove dust and lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid To remove fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Remove dust and lint with a blower When removing fingerprints and other stains Monitor wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather Do not apply pressure as this could result in damage or malfunction Lens mirror and viewfinder Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals M Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional Speedlights should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced 283 The Low Pass Filter The image sensor that acts as the camera s picture element is fitted with a low pass filter to prevent moir If you suspect that dirt or dust on the filter is appearing in photographs you can clean the filter using the Cl
143. cssscsecsssecsssecsecsssecseesees 223 CAs Modeling Flas Mennen enn E R R 228 eS Auto Bracketing Soloi aan T E ORE 229 BO Bracketing Ordo onara S 229 Te CONTE ONS ea aa TA A N asian ital 229 F Se SO Gi E E tabaci tare toca aes 229 f2 OK Button Shooting Mode sss esssseesssseessseeesseesossecsssseessseesssseessseeosseeosssersssseess 229 13 ASSIOI FEY BULEOM anas aA T A NA 230 F4 ASSIGN Preview BUttOM nnua E EA NEEE 232 TSSASSIOM AE L AF E BULIOMccueies oe cnt etatecna a eateries 232 16 CUSTOMIZE Command Dials sisinnaraa e a 233 f7 Release Button to Use Dial ssseesssseesssseessseeessseeossecsssseesssseeosseresseerosseeossseessssee 234 f8 Slot Empty Release LOCK uu sssesssssssesssscsssessessssscsssscsecscsecsssecsesssscsesscseescsscseees 234 TOs Reverse NAGI GATORS oaee eE T A 234 f10 Assign MB D11 G88 ButtOon sessseeesssseesossssecssssseressssecoossseerssssseresseseeosssseresssseeres 235 Tlie SECU Menu Camera Setup sarnana a aoesaeanassastnuuaes 236 Format Memory Card raona a oe a a O E OE 236 EED BNONICS Seinn A E 237 Vidco MOIE eenen a N eee 237 Flicker Reduction eienn a N eet OR 237 Timezone and Date eeano iira sees tresses O ET A OS 237 Lan GUaG 6 era E A eae Ges 238 mage Qo ga aa ai aussa E a 238 AUM gE ROION srera ance tn cectate ctor ahahaha Suttons hea 239 made DUSt OM Ref POCO sisicensccvaticnscsccostetiatiocnstovestenaesadh ciaueueedrodtnceaaesncwoneuannvaaees 240 UES UY MAIO oh zanna EE cu ta
144. ct the highlighted photograph PSs 4 gt Dye 100 4 100 5 100 6 Zoom OROK Choose settings for the JPEG copy Adjust image quality QO 85 image size M 88 white balance M 117 if Auto is selected white balance will be set to whichever of Normal and Keep warm lighting colors was in effect when the picture was taken exposure compensation M 107 Picture Control M 131 note that the Picture Control grid can not be displayed high ISO noise reduction M 205 color space 1 141 and D Lighting M 251 Note that white balance is not available with multiple exposures or pictures created with image overlay and that exposure compensation can only be set to values between 2 and 2 EV NEF RAW processing NORM Image quality Image size White balance Image quality IsOlOFF High ISO noise reduction SRGB Color space ER OFF D Lighting Cancel Zoom OKOK Copy the photograph Highlight EXE and press to create a JPEG copy of the selected photograph to exit without copying the photograph press the MENU button Resize MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create small copies of selected photographs 1 Select Resize 5 RETOUCH MENU To resize selected images press MENU to display Z Quick retouch the menus and select Resize in the retouch gt ton menu p Color sketch EJ Perspective control 2 Choose a destination E Resize If two memory cards are inserted you can choose i i
145. cted for Change main sub Note that except in the case of PC E NIKKOR lenses the sub command dial can not be used to adjust aperture during live view adjust aperture before starting live view If Aperture ring is selected aperture can only be adjusted with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display will show aperture in increments of 1 EV aperture for type G lenses is still set using the sub command dial Note that regardless of the setting chosen the aperture ring must be used to adjust aperture when a non CPU lens is attached e Menus and playback If Off is selected the multi selector is used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback highlight thumbnails and navigate menus If On or On image review excluded is selected the main command dial can be used to choose the picture displayed during full frame playback move the cursor left or right during thumbnail playback and move the menu highlight bar up or down while the sub command dial is used to display additional photo information in full frame playback and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail playback Select On image review excluded to prevent the command dials from being used for playback during image review While menus are displayed rotating the sub command dial right displays the sub menu for the selected option while rotating it left displays the previous menu To make a selection press gt or 233 234 f7 Release Butt
146. ctly Message is displayed stating that no images are available for playback Select All for Playback folder C1 195 Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in wide landscape orientation e Select On for Rotate tall 1 200 e Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 239 e Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken 2 239 e Photo is displayed in image review M 200 Can not delete picture e Picture is protected remove protection M 174 e Memory card is locked M 33 Can not retouch picture Photo can not be further edited with this camera M 249 Can not change print order e Memory card is full delete pictures 36 175 e Memory card is locked M 33 Can not select photo for printing Photo is in NEF RAW format Create JPEG copy using NEF RAW processing or transfer to computer and print using ViewNX 2 supplied or Capture NX 2 available separately Picture is not displayed on TV e Choose correct video mode M 237 or output resolution M 194 e A V 191 or HDMI QI 193 cable is not correctly connected Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI CEC television e Select On for HDMI gt Device control in the setup menu M 194 e Adjust HDMI CEC settings for the television as described in documentation provided with the device Can not transfer photos to computer OS not compatible with camera or transfer software Use card reader to copy
147. cture Conr SS v v E eE 7 3 7 2 Active D Lighting S e wv e 9 e 7 7 7 Multiple exposure SS y ve 7 7 7 AF mode viewfinder v4 AF area mode viewfinder v3 AF mode Live view movie v3 5 AF area mode Live view movie v4 ZAELAFLbutonhold ss W WW v v v v v v exible program ee ee Metering SS o fv 1 1 Exposure compensations v v Bracketing SSS wv 1 1 1 1 Flashmode SSW ww Flash compensation gt v v Wok v viv Vv lv gap ph ppp ahhy SSP S ASSESS SIS PST SIS or Ena anans Sepsssssasoa ilian SS Ssessssn iy ESS SSS S53 Sass ssa esos SISALS S gt gt SaD SaD S S iV viv v v viv v v viv v d3 ISO display and adjustment Y VW v v d4 Viewfinder warning display CAKARA E vV viv v v viv v KATALA ALAKA vivi vi v d5 Screen tips ee e FE Za FG b3 Easy exposure compensation ESS AE wiviere v vv vy Fa Za b4 Center weighted area KALAA PRAT T Me a7 Built in AF assist illuminator Y VW W v EARAR AES KALAA a8 Live view movie AF Vi v V release button AE L VW V viv 1 Exposure delay mode 2 Flash warning 3 MB D11 battery type 0 LCD illumination 4 Battery order a3 Focus tracking with lock on vey a4 AF point illumination b5 Fine tune optimal exposure ALALA a1 AF C priority selection a2 AF S priority selection a5 Focus point wrap around a6 Number of focus points b1 ISO sensitivit
148. d for changes in flash zoom head position When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash M 223 FV lock can be used with remote SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash units if a any of the built in flash flash group A or flash group B is in TTL mode or b a flash group is composed entirely of SB 900 and SB 800 flash units in TTL or AA mode Metering The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as follows Flash unit Flash mode Metered area Stand alone flash unit 4 mm circle in center of frame Area metered by flash exposure meter i TTL Entire f Used with other flash units ntre frame Advanced Wireless Lighting oo Area metered by flash exposure meter A master flash See Also For information on using the depth of field preview or AE L AF L button for FV lock see Custom Setting f4 Assign preview button M 232 or Custom Setting f5 Assign AE L AF L button M 232 Other Shooting Options Restoring Default Settings The camera settings listed below can be restored to E4 button default values by holding the QUAL and amp buttons down together for more than two seconds these buttons are marked by a green dot The control panel turns off briefly while settings are reset Option Focus point Center 96 88 Metering Matrix 105 AE AF lock hold 0 Image quality Image size White balance NORMAL AUTO T Bracketing 0 1
149. d hold the a Potala Q button to view images in other locations as described on page 164 hold BKT and press A zom WOK Retouch The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created with other devices 3 Select retouch options For more information see the section for the selected item To exit without creating a retouched copy press MENU Monitor off Delay The monitor will turn off and the operation will be cancelled if no actions are performed for 20 s this can be adjusted using Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay m 215 4 Create a retouched copy Press to create a retouched copy Retouched copies are indicated by a kK icon NORMAL 04928x3264 249 250 Creating Retouched Copies During Playback Retouched copies can also be created during playback Fix D Lighting Red eye correction X Trim Monochrome Filter effects go Color balance OK NEF RAW processing G 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 2 Cancel Display picture full frame and Highlight an option and Create retouched copy press QW press D Lighting MENU button gt gh retouch menu D lighting brightens shadows making it ideal for dark or backlit photographs ar IWij ii a Tie ina i ina i a E Ji L mer Si JE i AET EN p i o Tamm hE q pan P Before After Press A or W to choose the amount of correction performed D Lighting Th
150. d image Press to display the highlighted image full frame Delete highlighted Highlight images i i See page 175 for more information image Change protect status of 5 highlighted image lon See page 174 for more information Return to shooting IA Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken mode E N immediately Display menus MENU See page 195 for more information 171 Calendar Playback To view images taken on a selected date press the 9 button when 72 images are displayed Oe chh ee 100 2 100 3 Ea kE 100 7 100 8 K 100 9 i Full frame Calendar playback Thumbnail playback playback Press the 9 amp 2 button to toggle between the date list Thumbnail list and the list of thumbnails for the selected date Use ET the multi selector to highlight dates in the date list or to highlight pictures in the thumbnail list Date list The operations can be performed depend on whether the cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list To Ue Description Toggle between date Press 9H button in date list to place cursor in thumbnail list and thumbnail list R list Press again to return to date list Exit to thumbnail e Date list Exit to 72 frame playback playback Zoom in on Q e Thumbnail list Press and hold amp button to zoom in on highlighted photo highlighted picture Highlight dates vad e Date list Highlight date Highlight images Voy e Thumbnail list Highlight pictur
151. d is dark 4 Select Done Multiple exposure Highlight Done and press A icon will e be displayed in the control panel and the gt E Done option in the multiple exposure menu will be replaced by Reset To continue shooting without taking a multiple exposure return to the shooting menu and select Multiple exposure gt Reset 5 Framea photograph focus and shoot In continuous high speed and continuous low speed release modes M 78 the camera records all exposures in a single burst In self timer mode the camera will automatically record the number of exposures selected in Step 2 on page 152 regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots A 214 In other release modes one photograph will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed continue shooting until all exposures have been recorded for information on interrupting a multiple exposure before all photographs are recorded see page 154 The icon will blink until shooting ends 175 F55 When shooting ends multiple exposure a mode will end and the icon will no longer AF A B25 be displayed on A 153 154 BE Interrupting Multiple Exposures Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting menu while a E Multiple exposure multiple exposure is being recorded displays the options shown at right To interrupt a multiple exposure before the specified number of exposures have been taken
152. d setting is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel AF mode button cae dial 2006000 o 2000 566 0008 RFR Control panel Viewfinder AF Area Mode AF area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder Viewfinder AF area mode Single point AF 9 point dynamic area AF 21 point dynamic area AF Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Manual Focus Single point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used See Also For information on adjusting how long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of the camera see Custom Setting a3 Focus tracking with lock on A 209 See page 50 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording 95 Focus Point Selection The camera offers a choice of 39 focus points that can be used to compose photographs with the main subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame 1 Rotate the focus selector lock to This allows the multi selector to be used to select the focus point 2 Select the focus point Use the multi selector to select the focus point in the viewfinder while the exposure meters are on Press to select the center focus point The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked L position following selection to prevent the s
153. de M 69 71 Optional flash unit that does Subject too dark photo will be underexposed Change flash mode setting on not support i TTL flash control 278 blinks blinks ead en ear optional flash unit 5 If indicator blinks for 3s after Check photo in monitor if flash fires photo may be underexposed adjust settings 163 blinks underexposed and try again Memory insufficient to record e Reduce quality or size 85 88 further photos at current e Delete photographs 175 settings or camera has run out e Insert new memory card 29 of file or folder numbers Release shutter If error persists or appears frequently consult i Camera malfunction i i blinks Nikon authorized service representative 306 Indicator Control Monitor panel Problem aa z Camera cannot detect Turn camera off and confirm No memory card FES j 29 memory card that card is correctly inserted e Error accessing Use Nikon approved card 319 This memory card memory card Check that contacts are cannot be used clean If card is damaged Card may be contact retailer or Nikon damaged representative Insert another card e Unable to create new Delete files or insertnew 29 175 folder memory card Check that Eye Fi card 247 firmware is up to date Camera can not control Copy files on Eye Fi card to 29 32 Eye Fi card a computer or other device 179 and format card or insert new card 3 Memory
154. down W Cleaningoff Automatic image sensor cleaning off 1 Select Clean at startup shutdown E lean image sensor Display the Clean image sensor menu as described in Step 2 on the previous page gt t Clean now Highlight Clean at startup shutdown and t press gt 2 Select an option E Clean image sensor e Clean at startup shutdown Highlight an option and press Y ON Clean at startup S PN COLE g o AOE Clean at startup amp shutdowr GK Cleaning off l S M Image Sensor Cleaning Using camera controls interrupts image sensor cleaning Image sensor cleaning may not be performed at startup if the flash is charging Cleaning is performed by vibrating the low pass filter If dust can not be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu clean the image sensor manually M 286 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait 285 EE Manual Cleaning If foreign matter can not be removed from the low pass filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu M 284 the filter can be cleaned manually as described below Note however that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged Nikon recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon authorized
155. e Toggle full frame e Date list View first picture taken on selected date playback e Thumbnail list View highlighted picture Delete highlighted e Date list Delete all pictures taken on selected date photo s e Thumbnail list Delete highlighted picture M 175 ey Change protect status of highlighted Yon See page 174 for more information photo Return to shooting IA Monitor will turn off Photographs can be taken v mode N immediately Display menus MENU See page 195 for more information 172 Taking a Closer Look Playback Zoom Press the amp button to zoom in on the image displayed in full frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail or calendar playback The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect To Ue Description Press to zoom in to maximum of approximately 31 x large images 23 x Zoominorout amp amp medium images or 15 x small images Press 9i to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi selector to view areas of image not visible in monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation window is displayed when zoom ratio is altered area currently visible in monitor is indicated by yellow border View other areas of image Faces up to 35 detected during zoom are indicated by white borders in navigation window Rotate sub command dial to view other faces Select faces
156. e Custom Settings M 206 e E My Menu or Recent settings defaults to My Menu M 265 SETUP MENU Slider shows position in current menu eset user settings CD brightness lean image sensor Current settings are shown by icons Menu options Options in current menu Ifa 2 icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the Multiple exposure monitor help can be displayed by pressing the Yom Record the specified number of shots as beets a single image If no operations are button A description of the currently selected option or performed for 30 seconds shooting will z p CA end and a multiple exposure will be menu will be displayed while the button is pressed Press Dr created from any shots that have been N aken A or to scroll through the display t Yom button 18 Using Camera Menus The multi selector and button are used to navigate the camera menus Move cursor up button select highlighted item Cancel and return to Select highlighted item or previous menu display sub menu Move cursor down Follow the steps below to navigate the menus 1 Display the menus MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus 2 Highlight the icon for the current menu e ormat memory car Press lt to highlight the icon for the current Save user settings Reset user settings menu L CD brightness A Clean image sensor T Lock mirror up for cleaning Video
157. e e NEF RAW JPEG Single photograph recorded in both NEF RAW and JPEG formats Picture Control System Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape selected Picture Control can be modified storage for custom Picture Controls Media SD Secure Digital SDHC and SDXC memory cards Double slot Slot 2 can be used for overflow or backup storage or for separate storage of copies created using NEF JPEG pictures can be copied between cards File system DCF Design Rule for Camera File System 2 0 DPOF Digital Print Order Format Exif 2 3 Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras PictBridge Viewfinder Viewfinder Eye level pentaprism single lens reflex viewfinder Frame coverage Approx 100 horizontal and 100 vertical Magnification Approx 0 94 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m Eyepoint 19 5 mm 1 0 m7 Diopter adjustment 3 1 m7 Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark II screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview Pressing depth of field preview button stops lens aperture down to value selected by user A and M modes or by camera other modes Lens aperture Instant return electronically controlled 309 Lens Compatible lenses Shutter Type Speed Flash sync speed Release Release mode Frame advance rate CIPA guidelines Self timer Remote release modes Exposure Metering Meterin
158. e 1 920 x 1 080 24p 24 23 976 fos e 1 280 x 720 25p 25 fps e 1 280 x 720 24p 24 23 976 fos 640 x 424 25p 25 fps Choice of normal and high quality available Approx 20 minutes MOV H 264 MPEG 4 Advanced Video Coding Linear PCM Built in monaural or external stereo microphone sensitivity adjustable 7 5 cm 3 in 921k dot VGA low temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with 170 viewing angle 100 frame coverage and brightness adjustment Full frame and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 images or calendar playback with playback zoom movie playback slide show highlights histogram display auto image rotation and image comment up to 36 characters Hi Speed USB NTSC PAL images can be displayed on external device while camera monitor is on Type C mini pin HDMI connector camera monitor turns off when HDMI cable is connected Remote cord MC DC2 available separately GPS unit GP 1 available separately Stereo mini pin jack 3 5mm diameter Arabic Chinese Simplified and Traditional Czech Danish Dutch English Finnish French German Indonesian Italian Japanese Korean Norwegian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Thai Turkish 313 314 Power source Battery One rechargeable Li ion EN EL15 battery Battery pack Optional MB D11 multi power battery pack with one rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 Li ion battery or six AA alkaline NiMH or lithium batteries AC adapter EH 5a AC adapter require
159. e Modes A Portrait Use for portraits with soft natural looking skin tones If the subject is far from the background or a telephoto lens is used background details will be softened to lend the composition a sense of depth Landscape a lt ee Ce eet ee Use for vivid landscape shots in daylight The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Use for snapshots of children Clothing and background details are vividly rendered while skin tones remain soft and natural WA Fast shutter speeds freeze motion for dynamic sports shots in which the main subject stands out clearly The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off To take a sequence of shots select continuous release mode C1 7 77 78 41 42 Close Up Use for close up shots of flowers insects and other small objects a macro lens can be used to focus at very close ranges Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur Use for a natural balance between the main subject and the background in portraits taken under low light Use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Night Landscape Reduce noise and unnatural colors when photographing night landscapes including street lighting and neon signs The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur YN Pa
160. e effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph Cancel Zoom OWSave Red Eye Correction MENU button gt gh retouch menu This option is used to correct red eye caused by the flash and is available only with photographs taken using the flash The photograph selected for red eye correction is previewed as shown at right Confirm the effects of red eye correction and create a copy as described in the following table Note that red eye correction may not always produce the expected results and may in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not affected by red eye check the preview thoroughly before proceeding Cace Zoom OWSave To Use Description Zoom in Q Press amp button to zoom in Aaa button to zoom out While photo is zoomed in use multi Zoom out selector to view areas of image not visible in a monitor Keep multi selector pressed to scroll Viewother wA idl h ff Naviaati a rapidly to other areas of frame Navigation bv 4 v areas of image window is displayed when zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed area currently visible in cance monitor is indicated by yellow border Press 6 to cancel zoom If the camera detects red eye in the selected photograph a copy will be Create copy created that has been processed to reduce its effects No copy will be created if the camera is unable to detect red eye 251 Trim MENU
161. e increments used when making adjustments to SO PBECENMENT sensitivity If possible the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed If the current Y setting is not available at the new step value ISO sensitivity will PEES be rounded to the nearest available setting 3 b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select the increments used when making adjustments to GS b2 EV steps for exposure cntr shutter speed aperture exposure and flash compensation and bracketing Y Ga E 1 2 1 2 step 211 b3 Easy Exposure Compensation MENU button gt Custom Settings menu This option controls whether the 4 button is needed to set exposure compensation 1 107 If On Auto reset or On is selected the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even when exposure compensation is set to 0 Option Description Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the command dials see note below The setting selected using the command dial is reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off exposure compensation settings selected using the 4 button are not reset As above except that the exposure compensation value selected using RESET On Auto reset On the command dial is not reset when the camera or exposure meters turn off off Exposure compensation is set by pressing the 4 button and rotating the main command dial Change Main Sub T
162. e lens release button rotate the lens counter clockwise until it clicks into place Slide the A M switch to A autofocus if the lens has an M A M switch select M A for autofocus with manual override 25 26 EE Vibration Reduction VR AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lenses support vibration reduction VR which reduces blur caused by camera shake even when the camera is panned allowing shutter speeds to be slowed by approximately 3 EV Nikon measurements effects vary with the user and shooting conditions To use vibration reduction slide the VR switch to ON Vibration reduction is activated when the shutter release button is pressed halfway reducing the effects of camera shake on the image in the viewfinder and simplifying the process of framing the subject and focusing in both autofocus and manual focus modes When the camera is panned vibration reduction applies only to motion that is not part of the pan if the camera is panned horizontally for example vibration reduction will be applied only to vertical shake making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in a wide arc Vibration reduction can be turned off by sliding the VR switch to OFF Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely mounted on a tripod but leave it on if the tripod head is not secured or when using a monopod Detaching the Lens Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging l
163. ea if CPU lens is attached size of area can be selected using Custom Setting b4 Center weighted area M 213 if non CPU lens is attached area is 8 mm in diameter Classic meter for portraits recommended when using filters with an exposure factor filter factor over 1x Spot Camera meters circle 3 5 mm 0 14 in in diameter approximately 2 5 of frame Circle is centered on current focus point making it possible to meter off center subjects if non CPU lens is used or if auto area AF is in effect camera will meter center focus point Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed even when background is much brighter or darker For improved precision with non CPU lenses specify lens focal length and maximum aperture in Non CPU lens data menu M 159 To choose a metering option press the amp 3 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel See Also For information on making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method see Custom 3 button Main command dial Setting b5 Fine tune optimal exposure M 213 Control panel 105 Autoexposure Lock Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering exposure 106 1 Set metering to 2 or LJ M 105 Choose 2 to assign the greatest weight to the center of frame or L J to set exposure for a 3 5 mm circle centered on the active focus point K3 will not
164. ean image sensor option in the setup menu The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off HE Clean Now 1 Place the camera base down Image sensor cleaning is most effective when the camera is placed base down as shown at right 2 Display the Clean image sensor menu MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus f 2 m SETUPMENU A z A F t d Highlight Clean image sensor in the setup 7 henee AS Reset user settings menu and press P amp LCD brightness 0 Ly Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode kJ HDMI 3 Select Clean now E Clean image sensor Highlight Clean now and press W gt Lg Clean now SK S fe Clean at startup shutdown 5 The message shown at right will be displayed while cleaning is in progress Cleaning image sensor The message shown at right will be displayed when cleaning is in complete 284 BE Clean at Startup Shutdown Choose from the following options Option Description Theim nsori matically clean h time the camera is turn SON Clean at startup ba age sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned an Clean at The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time OFF i shutdown the camera is turned off aon Cleanatstartu i OR amp shutdown P The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shut
165. ease color saturation saturation V to decrease Press to create a S N 2 monochrome copy SJO y Decrease Darker Lighter OKSave saturation 253 Filter Effects MENU button gt gh retouch menu Choose from the following filter effects After adjusting filter effects as described below press to copy the photograph Option Description Creates the effect of a skylight filter making the Skylight picture less blue The effect can be previewed in the monitor as shown at right Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects giving the Warm filter copy a warm red cast The effect can be previewed in the monitor Red intensifier Intensify reds Red intensifier greens Green Green intensifier intensifier or blues Blue intensifier Press A to increase the effect V to decrease Blue intensifier Darker Lighter OK Save Add starburst effects to light sources e Number of points Choose from four six or eight e Filter amount Choose the brightness of the light sources affected Cross screen je Filter angle Choose the angle of the points e Length of points Choose the length of points e Confirm Preview the effects of the filter as shown at right Press amp to preview the copy full frame e Save Create a retouched copy Cross screen Number of points a Carcel Zoom So ft Soft Add a soft filter effect Press A or W to choose the filter Tei Tel Normal strength Cancel Zoom OW
166. ect and return to previous menu Only options supported by current printer will be displayed Border Menu shown at right will be displayed Press A or VW to choose Printer default print using current printer settings Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu Time stamp This option is available only with printers that support cropping Menu shown at right will be displayed To exit without cropping picture highlight No cropping and press k To crop picture highlight Crop and press gt Cropping If Crop is selected dialog shown at right will be displayed Press amp to increase size of crop 9E to decrease Choose position of crop using multi selector and press 6 Note that print quality may drop if small crops are printed at large sizes m Page size Printer default 3 5x5 in 5x7 in A4 A No of copies H Border Printer default Print with border No border A Time stamp Printer default Print time stamp No time stamp a Cropping No cropping a Cropping 4 Start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have been printed press OK Cancel V NEF RAW NEF RAW photographs M 85 can not be printed by direct USB connection JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu M 258
167. ed while the slide show is in progress To Description Skin back ekipahead Press lt to return to previous frame to skip to next View additional photo info Change photo info displayed 165 Pause resume Pause or resume slide show Exit to playback menu MENU End slide show and return to playback menu eaeainlavaaclnade End slide show and exit to full frame M 163 or aed thumbnail playback 171 Press shutter release button halfway to return to Exit to shooting mode Yy y D shooting mode The dialog shown at right is displayed when the show ends Select Restart to restart or Exit to return to the playback menu Restart 2s Frame interval E Exit 201 The Shooting Menu Shooting Options To display the shooting menu press MENU and select the 3 shooting menu tab MENU button SHOOTING MENU gt SHOOTING MENU Reset shooting menu Poy Reset shooting menu 7 Storage folder 100 7 Storage folder 100 File naming DSC File naming DSC _ Role played by card in Slot2 O A 2 _ Role played by card in Slot2 C A Image quality NORM 4 Image quality NORM Ly Image size JPEG compression iis JPEG compression El NEF RAW recording Vv El NEF RAW recording The shooting menu contains the following options Option aa Option AA Reset shooting menu 202 Auto distortion control 205 Storage folder 203 Color space 141 File naming 204 Active D Lighting 139 Role pl
168. eed and aperture mode P aperture mode S or shutter speed modes A and M If auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled in modes P S and A the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded in mode M the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed 111 EE White Balance Bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph each with a different white balance For more information on white balance see page 117 1 Select white balance bracketing GS e5 Auto bracketing set Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting e5 Auto EA bracketing set F AE AE only os Flashonly WB WB bracketing amp ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and the order in which they will be taken GA Number of shots Fj Bracketing progress tam PLACRENND prog indicator BKT button Main command dial Control panel BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see right the control panel will show mma 3 Select a white balance increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose from increments of 1 5 mired A 121 2 10 mired or 3 15 mired The B value indi
169. eesseesseessees 87 DPOF scenes 182 185 189 318 FOCUS point wrap around 209 BEG fine 85 Dynamic area AF 94 95 Focus tracking aa 2a A07 JPEG OPM al se sscardeacrnercriaria 85 Focus tracking with lock on 209 FOCUSING SCFECN eessececececeeseeees 309 323 324 Landscape Set Picture Control 131 Language sect ecssisstitecnsincieics 27 238 Large Image SIZE essssecseseseeees 88 LED aeae e 237 LCD brightneSS ss essssesssssersssseeo 237 LCD iNUMINATION sees 219 LENS essesssseeeees 25 26 159 246 269 LENS CaN nisinsin iinei 25 Lens distance information 146 Lens FOCUS ring esseceeeees 25 55 99 LENS MOUNN ccsscscecereeees 4 25 100 Lens VR SWItCHI esessesesseeeees 25 26 LIVE VIQW cscssssssossscssssarereseseees 49 57 Live view SWITCH eeseseseeeeee 49 57 Live view movie AF 50 211 Local area network eesseseeeees 280 Lock mirror up for cleaning 286 Long exp NR sssssssessessesssesssessesssee 205 Lossless compressed Type 87 M Magenta cune anda 119 255 Main command dial ce0 13 Manage Picture Control 136 Manual crassrisuensiauialecninenners 71 99 Manual Flash cntrl for built in TAS Ih EE AAA E A 224 Manual FOCUS c sssscsescesseeseees 55 99 Manual movie settings Movie SELUNGS siisii estiss 60 Max continuous release 217 Maximum aperture ececeeeees 100 MB D11
170. effect this produces with moving light sources is shown below at left Front curtain sync Rear curtain sync Shutter Speeds Available with the Built in Flash The following shutter speeds are available with the built in flash Shutter speed Shutter speed a P A 2 2 9 1 250 1 60 S 250 30 s 250 125 S 250 30 s bus hn 250 1 S Speeds as fast as 1 s 000 s are available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 flash units in modes P and A if 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP is selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 222 See Also See page 149 for information on locking flash value FV for a metered subject before recomposing a photograph For information on auto FP high speed sync and choosing a flash sync speed see Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 222 For information on choosing the slowest shutter speed available when using the flash see Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed M 223 For information on flash control and using the built in flash in commander mode see Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash A 223 See page 275 for information on using optional flash units 145 Flash Control Mode The camera supports the following i TTL flash control modes e i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR Flash emits series of nearly invisible preflashes monitor preflashes immediately before main flash Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up
171. elected focus point from changing when the multi selector is pressed Auto area AF The focus point for auto area AF is selected automatically manual focus point selection is not available See Also For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated see Custom Setting a4 AF point illumination M 209 For information on setting focus point selection to wrap around see Custom Setting a5 Focus point wrap around 209 For information on choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector see Custom Setting a6 Number of focus points 1 210 For information on changing the role of the button see Custom Setting f2 OK button shooting mode M 229 96 Focus Lock Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final composition If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus M 93 focus lock can also be used to recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at the same distance as your original subject Focus lock is most effective when an option other than auto area AF is selected for AF area mode M 94 1 Focus Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway to initiate focus Check that the in focus indicator appears in the viewfinder 2 Lock focus AF A and AF C focus modes With the shutter rele
172. en the shot with the negative increment is taken and the 4 segment when the shot with the positive increment is taken Exposure increment Exposure increment Exposure increment 0 EV m 1 EV 1 EV F74 To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and H icon are no longer displayed 110 Exposure and Flash Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes M 78 shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 109 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots M 214 In other release modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on Exposure Bracketing The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter so
173. ening shot and focus as described in Steps 4 and 5 of Live View M 51 52 Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in face priority AF drops during movie recording Start recording Press the movie record button to start recording the camera can record both video and sound do not cover the microphone on the front of the camera during recording A recording indicator and the time available are displayed in the monitor Exposure can be locked by pressing the Movie record button AE L AF L button M 106 or in modes P S A and M altered by up to 3 EV in steps of 3 EV using exposure compensation M 107 note that depending on the brightness of the subject changes to exposure may have no visible effect and that exposure compensation is not available when On is selected for Manual movie settings in mode M as described on page 60 In autofocus mode focus can be locked by pressing the shutter release button Time remaining halfway Recording indicator See Also The behavior of the AE L AF L button can be adjusted using Custom Setting f5 Assign AE L AF L button M 232 End recording Press the movie record button again to end recording to end recording return to live view and take a photograph press the shutter release button all the way down Recording will end automatically when the maximum length is reached or the memory card is full Maximum Length Each movie file can be up to
174. enses To remove the lens press and hold the lens release button while turning the lens clockwise After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring M 269 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number Vibration Reduction Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration reduction is in effect If power to the lens is cut while vibration reduction is on the lens may rattle when shaken This is not a malfunction and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and turning the camera on Vibration reduction is disabled while the built in flash is charging When vibration reduction is active the image in the viewfinder may be blurred after the shutter is released This does not indicate a malfunction Basic Setup A language selection dialog will be displayed the first time the camera is turned on Choose a language and set the time and date Photographs can not be taken until you have set the time and date 1 Turn the camera on A language selection dialog will be displayed 2 Selectala nguage Language LANG Cestina Press A or F to highlight the desired language Dansk Deutsch and press 6 A English Espa ol Frangais Indonesia Italiano 3 Choose a time zone Time zone A time zone selection dialog will be displayed peers Press lt or P to highlight the local time zone t
175. enstsnnnuen 261 Sub command dial eee 13 T Television e ccceccesescesesesesseeees 191 237 Thumbnail playback 04 171 BLL E teen ree tee AEE ner Reni ener 237 Time stamp PictBridge 184 187 TIME ZONE sssesssessssesesessssesesese 27 237 Time zone and date 27 237 TIMET ovis itieerseeateance 80 155 TONIN G iniri 134 135 Mesrine eitia 252 U USB onnesesesessesesesesesseseseeseseseseee 180 182 USB cable wees 180 182 UTC reenen 27 162 169 V Vibration Reduction eee 26 Video MOde sesesesesesesessesesessses 237 Viewfinder s s 9 34 281 309 Viewfinder eyepiece s sss s 81 Viewfinder eyepiece cap 81 Viewfinder fOCUS ee 34 281 Viewfinder grid display 216 Viewfinder warning display 216 VIOWNX 2 eeeseeseeseeeseeeseesees 142 179 Virtual horizon uu eeseeseeeeseseeees 245 Vivid Set Picture Control 131 Ww Warm filter Filter effects 254 WB sessies 112 117 WB bracketing Auto bracketing SG EEEN 112 114 229 White balance ss sse 0s0 112 117 White balance bracketing 112 WITElOSS eesscesessesessesssesseees 181 280 Wireless network 00 181 280 Wireless transmitter 181 280 WTE bieiin 181 280 325 326 No reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without writte
176. er release button is pressed Note that noise reduction will be performed if the subject is poorly lit increasing recording times If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data SRNR TET and the message shown at right will be displayed Choose appropriate Change exposure settings another reference object and repeat the process from and try again step 1 m Image Dust Off Reference Data The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Reference images can not be viewed using computer imaging software A grid pattern is displayed when reference images are viewed on the camera i 100D7000 DSC_0013 NDF 15 04 2010 10 02 27 241 Battery Info MENU button gt Setup menu View information on the battery currently inserted in the camera 242 Item Bat meter Pic meter Battery age es Battery info 2 Bat meter Pic meter a B EOR attery age OK Done Description The current battery level expressed as a percentage The number of times the shutter has been released with the current battery since the battery was last charged Note that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without recording a photograph for example when measuring preset white balance A five level display showing battery age 0 1H indicates that battery performance is unimpaired 4 t
177. ering continues from the last number used YE when a new folder is created the memory card is formatted or PERIZ a new memory card is inserted in the camera 5 rA T Option Description When a new folder is created the memory card formatted or a new memory card inserted in the camera file numbering continues from the last number used or from the largest file number in the current folder whichever is higher If a a photograph is taken when the current folder contains a photograph numbered 9999 a new folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again from 0001 File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created the memory card is off formatted or anew memory card is inserted in the camera Note that a new folder is created automatically if a photograph is taken when the current folder contains 999 photographs As for On except that the next photograph taken is assigned a file number by RESET Reset adding one to the largest file number in the current folder If the folder is empty file numbering is reset to 0001 File Number Sequence If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999 photographs or a photograph numbered 9999 the shutter release button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken Choose Reset for Custom Setting d8 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert anew memory card 218 d9 Information Display MENU bu
178. erval between shots see Custom Setting c3 Self timer A 214 For information on choosing the length of time the camera will remain in stand by mode waiting for a signal from the remote control see Custom Setting c5 Remote on duration MA 215 For information on controlling the beeps that sound when the self timer and remote control are used see Custom Setting d1 Beep A 215 Mirror up Mode Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera movement when the mirror is raised Use of a tripod is recommended 1 Select mirror up mode Press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to Mup V FORMATY Z Release mode dial 2 Raise the mirror Frame the picture focus and then press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror M Mirror Up While the mirror is raised photos can not be framed in the viewfinder and autofocus and metering will not be performed 3 Takea picture Press the shutter release button all the way down again to take a picture To prevent blurring caused by camera movement press the shutter release button smoothly or use an optional remote cord M 281 The mirror lowers when shooting ends Mirror up Mode A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised See Also For information on using the optional ML L3 remote control for mirr
179. es up to a maximum of 35 are detected the camera will focus on the closest subject to choose a different subject press the multi selector up down left or right fo wa wide and normal area AF Use the multi selector to move the focus point anywhere in the frame or press to position the focus point in the center of the frame 464 subject tracking AF Position the focus point over your subject and press 6 The focus point will track the selected subject as it moves through the frame Iso mn amo IUU Focus point V Using Autofocus in Live View Use an AF S lens The desired results may not be achieved with other lenses or teleconverters Note that in live view autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses The focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus The camera may be unable to focus in the following situations The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame The subject lacks contrast The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness or the subjectis lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other light source that changes in brightness Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent mercury vapor sodium vapor or similar lighting A cross star filter or other special filter is used The subject appears smaller than the focus point The subject is dominated by regular geometr
180. es not respond to controls See A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras below Control panel and viewfinder displays are unresponsive and dim The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature Fine lines are visible around active focus point or display turns red when focus point is highlighted These phenomena are normal for this type of viewfinder and do not indicate a malfunction A Note on Electronically Controlled Cameras In extremely rare instances unusual characters may appear in the control panel and the camera may stop functioning In most cases this phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge Turn the camera off remove and replace the battery taking care to avoid burns and turn the camera on again or if you are using an AC adapter available separately disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again If the problem persists contact your retailer or Nikon authorized service representative 299 300 Shooting All Modes Camera takes time to turn on Delete files or folders Shutter release disabled e Memory card is locked full or not inserted M 29 32 e Built in flash is charging Gi 39 e Camera is not in focus M 38 e CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at highest f number If FE E is displayed in control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f6 Customize command dials gt Aperture setting to use
181. es sae eds ice ise eva nea 97 Manual FO CUS oria a E O TAN EEEN 99 ISO Sensitivity 101 Auto ISO Sensitivity CONTO l ancrenmncnysnni enan NE 103 Exposure Bracketing 105 MAE EOT N EA TA AAA 105 Autoexpos Te LOCKesrcnssssnnmisnenon ea Aa 106 Exposure CompensatiOn ssesseseesesseseesesseeresseseescsescosesseseoseescosessescosessesresesseosessoseesessesse 107 E A CE g E A E ETE TEE E E E A 109 vi White Balance 117 Fine TUNING White Balance uuu sssssssessssccessssssssssescssssssssssssescsescssseesesesesesesssessesesesesees 119 Choosing a Color Temperature ceessssssesssssssssscsssesssssscsesescsessssesesescseesesssesesescseaeesees 122 Preset ci Ulielll 32 cesccecsexscoesgescocessasestesseatiatun irene rat oven nes E ETO NR 123 Image Enhancement 131 P Ure CORGO arse ceae ata sac agen aerate cates eae tse ete cres A E 131 Selecting a Picture Control essssesesssesscsessssssecscsecsssssscessescsssscessesessssecessecessecseassecess 131 M diiying Picture Controls se ccsssasevcsnseccscesscsanntassiacsaisbes NO 133 Creating Custom Picture Controls es sssessseesesessseessseesseesssessseeosserosseesseeonseosseeossersseesss 136 Sharing Custom Picture Controls essessseesssessseessseesseessseessseesseeossessserosseesserossesssseossees 138 Active D Lighting cessor sscsstassceceeatecasasnizeteaevnaec te ronvesettstntsnrasseeensoadenderneeneceaaae 139 ONO SACS a E A E E ET E 141 Flash Photography 143 Using the
182. esecsssecscsescsssecessesscees 213 C2 AUTO METEI OfF DELAY scccseciayasinssistovs chdensesncczisva wevatovnsotowsereotnnsetaitatscloysinmmeetonetboouteate 214 CBSE IF TIM T E L E AE E E ET E EN 214 CA MOnITOrOM DEII Y aha O AE 215 CS REMOLE Ol Durations a iaitacneslae 215 Gl SHOOUNG DIS DAY oxic etre need eid E A 215 CU BC cat ae tass Recta asc Meas xd ducts cess ap eon uses tu tnecc S 215 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display cssssssssssssssssssssssscsssscssssssesssscsessssecsssecsesscseesssecseesees 216 d3 ISO Display and Adjustment cccsssesessssecssessesssecsssecscsssecssseseesssecessesssesecess 216 d4 Viewfinder Warning Display cccssssssssssssessssecsssscsesssscsssssessssecssssssessssecseesees 216 15 SCHON NDS irinen E R N EE EAE 216 C6 CL Mode Shooting Spee raihana AE EA N 217 d7 Max Continuous Release sssessssessseesseessseessseesseesseessseeosseesseesssessserossersseessseesss 217 d8 File Number Sequence ssesssesssesssesssesseesseesseesseesseesseoseeoseesseosseosecsneesseesseesseesseess 218 GO INFORMATION Display sdo aiei T A 219 a1 GIB AMC lan ilar tale enaa a A N 219 d11 Expos re Delay Mode soneron ona ORO 219 a12 Flash Warning EE E EN T S 219 CTS MB D1T1Battery TYDE rao n A R 220 dTa Battery Order ae E On EE 221 e Bracke tnol Flas enea A N 222 el EAST SV ING SPD COG aE A E a 222 e2 Flash SIVUILEST SOC deae aA A 223 e3 Flash Critrl for Built in Flash nu sssessssessecsssecsssscsesssse
183. ess if Off is selected paaien ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value l OW selected by the user a 2 3 Adjust settings E 150 sensitivity settings The maximum value for auto ISO sensitivity MERNE ne e e o o Auto ISO sensitivity control ON gt can be selected using Maximum sensitivity gt 1 Maximum sensitivity 6400 choose lower values to prevent noise in the bazama form of randomly spaced bright pixels fog S F or lines the minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100 In modes P and A sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter speed 4000 1 s in modes and M sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by the user Slower shutter speeds will be used only if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value selected for Maximum sensitivity If the ISO sensitivity selected by the user is higher than the value selected for Maximum sensitivity the value selected for Maximum sensitivity will be used instead 103 Press to exit when settings are complete When On is selected the display at right appears in the viewfinder and control panel When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user these indicators blink and the altered value is shown in the information display isfy ISON EOF sR oA F OF FS M amp EE Auto ISO Sensitivity Contro
184. ess values for increased brightness lower values for reduced l brightness Live View See page 49 for information on adjusting monitor brightness in live view or during movie recording Video Mode MENU button gt Y Setup menu When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video connector be sure the camera video mode matches the device video standard NTSC or PAL Flicker Reduction MENU button gt setup menu Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or mercury vapor lighting during live view or movie recording Choose a frequency which matches that of the local AC power supply Flicker Reduction If you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply test both options and choose the one that produces the best results Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright in which case you should select mode A or Mand choose a smaller aperture larger f number before starting live view Note that flicker reduction is not available when On is selected for Movie settings gt Manual movie settings 60 in mode M Time Zone and Date MENU button gt Y Setup menu Change time zones set the camera clock choose the date display order and turn daylight saving time on or off Option Description Choose a time zone The camera clock is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Set the camera clock M 27 If the clock is not set a
185. esse 70 Mode M Manual ssccsicsiesiriiiansicrnna aiaa ane rts mes Tanne eve amr reeerrertr 71 Long Time Exposures M Mode Only ssssssssssssessssecsssssscsssessssesscsssecsssesscsssecssseees 73 User Settings U1 and U2 Modes 75 saving U oo Se MGS ena oo eer er E See oo OP rem a 75 Recalling User Settings sssrinin 76 m Resetting User Settings sessesseesesssesserseessesseeseosresseesoneeseroseonersseosesseoseossesseresesseseroseoseesees 76 Release Mode 77 Choosing a Release Mode sssssssssssssssssesesssescsssscsescscsesssscsesescsesesesesesesesesesecseseseacaessesees 77 Coninuous Mode ENO narodia aa EE EE 78 Self Timer and Remote Modes s ssesessesssesssesseesseesseceseceecesseesecesecesseesseesseesseesseesseesseroseess 80 DTI OWS ModE ssia E E osaaes 83 Image Recording Options 85 Mage Quality ANG OZO nee Ea O A 85 age OUY e E E E TA S 85 Mage ZE onr E E A E 88 USING Two Memory Cals s sssesseesssesssesssessseesseesseessessseosseosseosssessseosseossrossrossroseeoseeoseroseeosees 89 Focus 91 AOO US acess adetcsecapecesetecarcnestsvesscesceseeettecves isassenteecatsidstasctss eile iaviesestawtaavissssaseeaietrstaceietestis 91 Autofocus Mode sss fecssincvstovessnsvicnnscestvasteonsivecnsenss coctvouvadstonasicoaendees etlvsnsbaepvecuaeeoa istnodetsanwosb es 91 AFArea MOOG oerein ERA E sier enon amr eernenae 94 Focus POM Ms LOGEC Ices prov casrrsedeecrateseaerrtaceuceastseenap atetseseee i 96 FOCA S LO Ci gece e
186. esssees 81 EZ USB connector 3 MOUNTING Mark essesssssessssesseessssssessesseescsesseesees 25 CONNECTING to a COMPUTED ou eeeeeeceeeeseeees 180 6 Built in MICFOPNONE cesssecsseesseesseesssessseesees 58 60 Connecting toa printer s scssesessevestueesessseacseses 182 LENS release DUTCON enn 26 15 A V COnnectOoT Gn 191 8 CONNECHOL COVED cesecsesssecsssessseessees 180 182 191 193 16 HDMI Mini pin CONNEC CHO ecsssessssesssssessssseesseees 193 Cover for accessory terminal and external Accessory terminal c ssssssessessssecseeseeseeees 162 281 iM microphone Connectors sesecsecsesesseseeseeeeseeee 57 18 Connector for external Microphone ss ss 57 AF assist illuminator ssssesssssseesssssesssssseesssseesse 210 Self timer laMp sssesesseesssseessseessseessssesoseesosserosseees 81 Red eye reduction lamp ssssssessssssesssssseesssseesssss 145 BR Sub command dial 13 233 BE Fin Duti OMe 149 230 Depth of field preview button s 72 232 BE Battery chamber cover ssssssesseussesnsssnssen 24 6 Battery chamber Cover latch ssssesssesesseeeees 24 I The Microphone and Speaker Do not place the microphone or speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on the magnetic devices The Camera Body Continued 8 Power CONNECTOFP COVED c sssssssssssesescsesesescsesesees
187. essssessssscsessssssssecssssssecsssscsssscsessssucsesucsessssecasencseesssncaeesees 193 Menu Guide 195 gt The Playback Menu Managing Images c ssssssssssssssesssssssssssssssssssssesssssassecsseasssssseaseneess 195 PAY ACK FOLDET areren E AE 195 a AA S E E EE A A EAE A EE E EA eater ioe AE 196 PENAY MOOC ceanii n EEE E EE E 197 COPY IMAGE S sacre a a a eee 197 Mnage Revi EW eee ee eee et renner et ee ee ee eT 200 UN cy ad B i oan tere ree enter A E enero 200 FR ST Uo E E sae ects coe 200 ME ON asec es encase aes eases eesaate sages acne ete eae eestor 201 EE The Shooting Menu Shooting Options c ssecsscecsecsssessesessessssessessssessesssscssesessesseseeseeseees 202 RESET Shooting MENU scssissssvinrevsussscesnnteanvrssevenssonneeonvadedesodeandessosevensopnvanensstensessasbenasssesenss 202 Storage POUEI Auer ere eer aan EE een are eee ee ona ve ee ene 203 FUN PY ANIME hese xs a A T A neuen tes 204 Auto DISCOFMON COMIN OI erensia a enone 205 Long Exp NR Long Exposure Noise Reduction sssesssseesseesssessseessseesseesseeossee 205 ROMS ONR seat ca cesta cc eat E sate ees ceee 205 G Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings s ssssecsesssssssessessessesssssssssesscssesssesssseseeees 206 R Reset Custom Settings taicnscecscossesdbsncosichiusssssiesavedasessixsdincstoctduneduodusnstecrtorcestbandovscoins 207 E TICS 8a U AAE E E E E O E reer 208 al AF C Priority Selecti N s siseresiiisircnkeararraa
188. essssseressserress 67 16 ApertU ce a ne ee nee ene 67 19 Filename oreren 204 20 Image quality cesesscssssssssssseeessssssssssssseesessssssssseseeeeee 85 21 IMAGE SIZO ccssssesccsssscscsesssseserssscsesessnssssersssssssersasesser 88 Time Of recording sss sssssersssssessssseessssesrssss 27 237 23 Date of recording ssssessssrsssssesssrssssrrsssrrees 27 237 Current card SlOt i sssssssssssssssssessssssssssessssssssees 46 164 25 Folder NAIM sscssscsssccssssesersssesssessssosersssessresascosers 203 White balance ssssessssessssessssessssessssessssessssesssseessss 117 Color temperatur e ss sssseessssessseessssessssessssessss 122 White balance fine tuning ssssessssssssessssse 119 Preset Manual essessssssesssesssseessesessssersssersseeesss 123 Color SD ACO esrsnnnina aa on 141 Thumbnail Playback To display images in contact sheets of four nine or 72 images press the Q amp button i 10007000 DSC_00 PG ORMA 15 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 Full frame Calendar playback Thumbnail playback playback To Description Display more images Press Q to increase the number of images displayed Press amp to reduce the number of images displayed Display fewer images Q When four images are displayed press to view highlighted image full frame Use multi selector to highlight images for full frame playback playback zoom QA 173 deletion M 175 or protection M 174 View highlighte
189. etch 262 dol Color balance 255 Al Perspective control 263 Cah Image overlay 256 Miniature effect 263 NEF RAW processing 258 IM Edit movie 63 Cm Resize 259 mC Side by side comparison 264 C Quick retouch 260 1 Can only be selected by pressing MENU and selecting amp 4 tab 2 Only available if is pressed in full frame playback when a retouched image or original is displayed V Retouching Copies With the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit movie gt Choose start point Choose end point each effect can be applied only once note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail Options that can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and unavailable Image Quality Except in the case of copies created with Trim Image overlay NEF RAW processing and Resize copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original while copies created from NEF RAW photos are saved as large fine quality JPEG images Size priority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format 248 Creating Retouched Copies To create a retouched copy 1 Display retouch options A ELM e Ighting Highlight the desired item in the retouch menu gt Red eye correction Re and press P gt Masate Filter effects UA Color balance O Image overlay El NEF RAW processing 2 Selecta picture GS Color balance Highlight a picture and press 6 to view the highlighted picture full screen press an
190. flash 0 EV compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not Eid button pressed reset when the camera is turned off i FSB E 0 3 EV F55 mr iD 1 0 EV Optional Flash Units Flash compensation is also available with optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units The SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 also allow flash compensation to be set using the controls on the flash unit the value selected with the flash unit is added to the value selected with the camera See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 211 For information on automatically varying flash level over a series of shots see page M 109 148 FV Lock This feature is used to lock flash output allowing photographs to be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the center of the frame Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture To use FV lock 1 Assign FV lock to the Fn button Select FV lock for Custom Setting f3 Assign Fn button M 230 2 Raise the flash In P S A M and f modes the flash can be raised by pressing the button In a Z amp Fa and modes the flash will pop up automatically when required 3 Focus Position the subject in the center of the fra
191. focus in the viewfinder before shooting Focal Plane Position To determine the distance between your subject and the camera measure from the focal plane mark on the camera body The distance between the lens mounting flange and the focal plane is 46 5 mm 1 83 in TR Focal plane mark ISO Sensitivity ISO sensitivity is the digital equivalent of film speed Choose from settings that range from a value roughly equivalent to ISO 100 to one roughly equivalent to ISO 6400 in steps equivalent to 3 EV For special situations ISO sensitivity can be raised above ISO 6400 by from about 0 3 EV Hi 0 3 equivalent to ISO 8000 to about 2 EV Hi 2 equivalent to ISO 25600 Auto and scene modes also offer an AUTO option which allows the camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to lighting conditions The higher the ISO sensitivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the ISO button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder ISO button Control panel Viewfinder 101 102 AUTO If the mode dial is rotated to P S A or M after AUTO is selected for ISO sensitivity in another mode the ISO sensitivity last selected in P S A or M mode will be restored Hi 0 3 Hi 2 Pictures taken at these sett
192. focus points 210 Number of Shots 321 0 OK button shooting mode 229 Optimal quality JPEG COMPSeSSION esssssssessssseeseseesees 87 Optional flash eee 224 275 Output resolution HDMIl 194 Overflow Role played by card in STOT Z 89 Overview ata ecceecsesssseseseeseees 170 P Page size PictBridge 184 187 Perspective CONTIOL eseeeee 263 Photo info cscsscsesserscssoseeee 165 197 PictBridge ssseeessseessssersssseee 182 318 Picture Controls 00 131 133 Playback nsnsessssesssseesssseessssserssse 46 163 Playback folder essssssssseseesees 195 Playback information 165 197 Playback MeN 195 Playback slot and folderv 164 Playback ZOOM sssecsessseeseeeesees 173 Portrait Set Picture Control 131 Power Connector esses 280 282 Power SWItCh esseessseesseesseessseesseeoseeess 2 Predictive focus tracking 93 Preset manual White balance 117 123 Press the shutter release button all the way GOWN 38 39 Press the shutter release button halIWAY csiinwininmmsannman 38 39 Print DPOR cs iecsicehassnecantacunnte 185 Print SELECT sisses 185 Print set DPOF cscecsscsceesees 189 Printing eevee meer rere mere aeons 182 Programmed AUtO c ccseseceseeees 68 Protecting photograph 174 a Quick FETOUCH s sssessssseesssssessseeesssse 260 Quick response remote Remote cont
193. ft and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom lenses i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 6400 At values over 6400 the desired results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings Control panel If the flash fires in continuous release mode M 78 only one picture will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has been used for several consecutive shots The flash can be used again after a short pause 144 Flash Modes The flash modes listed on the previous page may combine one or more of the following settings as shown by the flash mode icon AUTO auto flash When lighting is poor or subject is back lit flash pops up automatically when shutter release button is pressed halfway and fires as required red eye reduction Use for portraits Red eye reduction lamp lights before flash fires reducing red eye off Flash does not fire even when lighting is poor or subject is back lit SLOW slow sync Shutter speed slows automatically to capture background lighting at night or under low light Use to include background lighting in portraits REAR rear curtain sync Flash fires just before shutter closes creating a stream of light behind moving light sources below at right If this icon is not displayed flash will fire as the shutter opens front curtain sync the
194. g method Range ISO 100 f 1 4 lens 20 C 68 F Exposure meter coupling 310 e DX AFNIKKOR All functions supported e Type Gor D AF NIKKOR All functions supported PC Micro NIKKOR does not support some functions IX NIKKOR lenses not supported e Other AF NIKKOR All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering Il Lenses for F3AF not supported e Al P NIKKOR All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering I e Non CPU Can be used in modes A and M color matrix metering and aperture value display supported if user provides lens data Al lenses only Electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture is f 5 6 or faster Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane shutter 1 3000 30 s in steps of 1 3 or 1 2 EV bulb time requires optional ML L3 remote control X250 X 250 s synchronizes with shutter at 1 320 s or slower flash range drops at speeds between 1 250 and 1 320 s S single frame CL continuous low speed CH continuous high speed Q quiet shutter release self timer remote control Mup mirror up 1 5 fps CL or 6 fps CH 25 55 10s 20 s 1 9 exposures at intervals of 0 5 1 2 or 3 s Delayed remote quick response remote remote mirror up TTL exposure metering using 2 016 pixel RGB sensor e Matrix 3D color matrix metering II type G and D lenses color matrix metering II other CPU lenses color matrix metering available with non CPU lenses if u
195. g time charge the battery in the supplied MH 25 battery charger before use About 2 hours and 35 minutes are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains 1 Connect the AC power cable or wall adapter Connect the power cable as shown at right Use the AC adapter plug in the position shown do not rotate Depending on the country or region of purchase an AC wall adapter may also be supplied with the charger To use the adapter insert it into the charger AC inlet Slide the AC wall adapter latch in the direction shown and rotate the adapter 90 to fix it in the position shown Reverse these steps to remove the adapter 2 Remove the terminal cover Remove the terminal cover from the battery 21 3 Insert the battery Place the battery in the battery bay as shown in the illustration on the charger 4 Plug the charger in Battery Charging The CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery charges charging complete m Charging the Battery Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures between 5 35 C 41 95 F The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 C 32 F or above 60 C 140 F 5 Remove the battery when charging is complete Charging is complete when the CHARGE lamp stops blinking Unplug the charger and remove the battery 22 I The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xii xiii and 289 291 of this manual Do n
196. ge Weight Approx 420 g 14 8 oz Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain B g 315 EE The AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR The AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR is for use exclusively with Nikon DX format digital cameras Superior optical performance and image rendering are ensured by the use of aspherical lens elements and elements made using extra low dispersion ED glass to correct chromatic aberration A rounded aperture produces soft esthetically pleasing blurring of point light sources in out of focus areas of the image bokeh If the camera is equipped with an AF ON button vibration reduction will not be activated when the AF ON button is pressed Using the Built in Flash When using the built in flash be sure the subject is at a range of at least 0 6 m 2 ft and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built in flash Camera Minimum distance without vignetting 2 5m 8ft 2in D5000 D3100 D3000 10m 3ft 3in D700 D7000 D300 series D200 D100 D80 No vignetting at any focus distance 1 5m 4ft 11in O ORNES No vignetting at any focus distance B0 1 0m 3ft 3in No vignetting at any focus distance 2 5m 8ft 2in D60
197. ge size OK v JPEG compression v NEF RAW recording Ka A Choose position _ a 2 Image quality NORM JPEG compression Bs _ NEF RAW recording f3 Assign Fn button Move ale 265 5 Add more items Se Add items 0 N Reset shooting menu The items currently displayed in My Menu L __ Storage folder are indicated by a check mark Items alae by card in Slot 2 indicated by a Nicon can not be selected Do ME Repeat steps 1 4 to select additional items EE Deleting Options from My Menu 1 Select Remove items In My Menu highlight Remove items and press P 2 Select items E Remove items s Done Highlight items and press to select or 5 x F Y O Image quality deselect Selected items are indicated by a C E JPEG compression SA C NEF RAW recording check mark O 3Assign Fn button 3 Select Done E Removeitems Highlight Done and press 68 A BS amp Imaoe size g 7 Y O Image quality confirmation dialog will be displayed C JPEG compression SA C NEF RAW recording O 3Assign Fn button Delete the selected items Press to delete the selected items Q Delete selected item Yes MEND Cancel Deleting Items in My Menu To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu press the f button A confirmation dialog will be displayed press 1 again to remove the selected item from My Menu 266 EE Reordering Options in My Menu 1 Select Rank items In My Menu E highlig
198. h 14 bit White balance Auto gt Normal 117 of To s000K T Set Picture Control Standard 131 Auto distortion control Off 205 Color space sRGB 141 Active D Lighting 139 Long exp NR 205 Option AA Rotate tall Slide show 2 A Normal 205 Option High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity i 103 Multiple exposure Reset 152 Movie settings 1920x1080 Movie quality 24 fps high guaio Destination a 1 Off Manual movie settings a t 99 Interval timer shooting Reset Remote control mode Delayed remote 155 80 1 Default settings restored with Reset shooting menu M 202 2 Reset shooting menu can not be selected while shooting is in progress 3 Shooting ends when reset is performed Default of 0 295 EE Custom Settings Menu Defaults Option Default E al AF C a selection Release 208 a2 Focus 208 a3 3 Normal 209 4 AF point illumination Auto 209 K Focus point wrap around No wrap 209 a6 Number of focus points 39 points 210 a7 Built in AF assist illuminator On 210 a8 Live view movie AF Single servo AF 211 AF area mode Normal area AF 211 b1 ISO sensitivity step value 1 3 step 211 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 step 211 3 2 b4 Center weighted area 68mm 213 b5 Fine tune optimal exposure Mamee SS Cener eigtedneteing 0 23 Spot metering a a aE Cawtometeroffdely 6s 74 c3 Self timer Kreiso o c4
199. h units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions 60 orless r 5 m 15 ft or Wireless remote sensors 10 m 33 ft orless 30 or T less N e AANO E K camera i A3 Camera pi built in flash p or less g F m 15 ft or less 60 or less 4 7 Set the remote flash units to the selected channel Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel selected in Step 4 See the flash unit instruction manuals for details 8 Raise the built in flash Press the button to raise the built in flash Note that even if is selected for Built in flash gt Mode the built in flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be emitted 9 Frame the photograph focus and shoot After confirming that the camera flash ready light and the flash ready lights for all other flash units are lit frame the photograph focus and shoot FV lock M 149 can be used if desired 227 The Flash Sync Mode Display does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when is selected for Built in flash gt Mode Flash Compensation The flash compensation value selected with the Hid button and sub command dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the built in flash group A and group B in the Commander mode menu A Ei icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash compensation value other than 0 is selected for Built in flash gt TTL The icon flashes when the buil
200. he UTC field shows the difference between the selected time zone and Coordinated Universal Time or UTC in hours and press 4 Choose a date format Time zone and date Press A or W to choose the order in which the Date format year month and day will be displayed Press A Wolo M D Y Month Day Y to proceed to the next step Day Month Year 5 Turn daylight saving time on or off Time zone and date Daylight saving time options will be displayed pil ail Daylight saving time is off by default if daylight On saving time is in effect in the local time zone Off press A to highlight On and press 6 6 Set the date and time Time zone and date Date and time The dialog shown at right will be displayed Press lt or P to select an item A or V to change Press to set the clock and exit to shooting mode 2 28 Setting the Clock Language and date time settings can be changed at any time using the Language M 238 and Time zone and date M 237 options in the setup menu The camera clock can also be synchronized with GPS devices M 162 The Clock Battery The camera clock is powered by an independent rechargeable power source which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed or the camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5a AC adapter M 280 Two days of charging will power the clock for about three months If the icon flashes in the control panel the clock battery is exhausted
201. he dial used to set exposure compensation when On Auto reset or On is selected for Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f6 Customize command dials gt Change main sub M 233 Customize command dials gt Change main sub On Bi Sub command dial Sub command dial 5 Sub command dial Main command dial S A Main command dial Sub command dial M N A Show ISO Easy ISO Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation can not be used with Custom Setting d3 Show ISO Easy ISO Adjustments to either of these items reset the remaining item a message is displayed when the item is reset 212 b4 Center Weighted Area MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When calculating exposure center weighted metering assigns the Option greatest weight to a circle in the center of the frame The diameter b 96 b 6mm of this circle can be set to 6 8 10 or 13 mm or to the average of the 98 6 8mm _ entire frame 10 610mm 13 613 mm Avg Average b5 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Use this option to fine tune the exposure value selected by the PEmmmri camera Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering method by from 1 to 1 EV in steps of e EV f 0 Note that the diameter is fixed at 8 mm when a non CPU lens is used aa Center weighted metering i Spot metering V Fine Tuning Exposure Exposure fine tuning is
202. he results can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Perspective Control MENU button gt g retouch menu Create copies that reduce the effects of perspective taken from Perspective control the base of a tall object Use the multi selector to adjust perspective note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out The results can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy Before Miniature Effect MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama Works best with photos taken from a high vantage point To Description Miniature effect If photo is displayed in wide orientation press A or to position frame showing area of copy mer ive that will be in focus Cance C qpnfirm Ok Save Area in focus Choose area in focus If photo is displayed in tall orientation Q 239 press lt or gt to position frame showing area of copy that will be in focus arce C Confirm OWSave Preview copy amp Preview copy Cancel gt Exit to full frame playback without creating copy Create copy Create copy 263 Side by side Comparison MENU button gt gh retouch menu Compare retouched copies to the original photographs This option i
203. highlight Cancel and E press 68 If shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have been taken a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point If Auto gain is on gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded Note that shooting will end automatically if e Atwo button reset is performed M 151 e The camera is turned off e The battery is exhausted e Pictures are deleted m Multiple Exposures Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple exposure The information listed in the playback photo information display including metering exposure shooting mode focal length date of recording and camera orientation is for the first shot in the multiple exposure Interval Timer Photography If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is taken the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been taken the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is ignored These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting Other Settings While multiple exposure mode is in effect memory cards can not be formatted and some menu options will not be available Interval Timer Photography
204. hile light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5 000 5 500 K appear white light sources with a lower color temperature such as incandescent light bulbs appear slightly yellow or red Light sources with a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue The camera white balance options are adapted to the following color temperatures F sodium vapor lamps 2 700 K 3 direct sunlight 5 200 K 6 incandescent 4 flash 5 400 K i warm white fluorescent 3 000 K cloudy 6 000 K a mt white fluorescent 3 700 K mt daylight fluorescent 6 500 K mi MI x cool white fluorescent 4 200 K mm high temp mercury vapor 7 200 K day white fluorescent 5 000 K amp shade 8 000 K WW A See Also When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing set M 229 the camera will create several images each time the shutter is released White balance will be varied with each image bracketing the value currently selected for white balance M 112 Fine Tuning White Balance White balance can be fine tuned to compensate for variations in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an image White balance is fine tuned using the White balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial EE The White Balance Menu 1 Select a white balance option MENU button To display the menus press the MENU
205. ht Rank items and press P 2 Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press 6 3 Position the item Press Aor V to move the item up or down in My Menu and press 68 Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items 4 Exit to My Menu Press the MENU button to return to My Menu gt Rankitems Image quality a JPEG compression y NEF RAW recording OK Select items E Rank items e Image quality a JPEG compression NEF RAW recording lf3Assign Fn button Em TA SU ale MENU button FSS co MYMENU e f3Assign Fn button z mage quality NORM AA JPEG compression iia T NEF RAW recording Ge 4 Add items Remove items Rank items EJ Choose tab vo SO UAL o 267 Recent Settings To display the twenty most recently used settings select Recent settings for i My Menu gt Choose tab 1 Select Choose tab In My Menu E highlight Choose tab and press gt 2 Select 8 Recent settings Highlight amp Recent settings and press The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS MY MENU gt e Image quality z JPEG compression NEF RAW recording _ 3Assign Fn button A Add items L Remove items Rank items 211 Choose tab im Choose tab Y i MyMenu Ca A E Recent settings Menu items are added to the top of the recent settings menu as they are used To view My Menu aga
206. ic patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper The subject is moving 51 5 Focus Press the shutter release button halfway to focus 2 face priority AF The camera sets focus for the face in the double yellow border while the shutter release button is pressed halfway if the camera can no longer detect the LE subject because for example the subject has looked IDE F away borders will no longer be displayed 25 S6 i00lre8 fwe vow wide and normal area AF The camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus point while the shutter release button is pressed halfway 44 subject tracking AF The camera focuses on the current subject To end tracking press V Subject Tracking The camera may be unable to track subjects if they are small moving quickly or a similar color to the background or if both the ON e a iS F56 aw Wore sls subject and the background are very bright or very dark the brightness and color of the subject or background varies greatly the subject leaves the frame or the subject visibly changes size The focus point will blink green while the camera focuses If the camera is able to focus the focus point will be displayed in green if the camera is unable to focus the focus point will blink red note that pictures can be taken even when the focus point blinks red check focus in the monitor before shooting Exposure can be locked by pressing the AE L AF
207. ich information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers e PictBridge A standard developed through cooperation with the digital camera and printer industries allowing photographs to be output directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer e HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI compliant devices via a single cable connection Trademark Information Macintosh Mac OS and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple Inc in the United States and or other countries Microsoft Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries PictBridge is a trademark The SD SDHC and SDXC logos are trademarks of the SD 3C LLC HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 318 Approved Memory Cards The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved for use in the D7000 Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are recommended for movie recording Reco
208. icon marks notes information that should be read before using the camera CH This icon marks references to other pages in this manual M Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its operational and safety requirements THE USE OF NON NIKON ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY M Servicing the Camera and Accessories The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing Nikon recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced Camera Settings The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used Getting to Know the Camera Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and displays You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual The Camera Body AUL r T ANU ana SS SB J 6 E Release
209. ield of flowers coor Example Blinds or a row of S on or other subjects that are TERDA BI Fi A EE windows in a skyscraper FN e small or lack variation in brightness See Also For information on using focus priority in continuous servo AF see Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection A 208 For information on using release priority in single servo AF see Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection M 208 See page 50 for information on the autofocus options available in live view or during movie recording 93 AF Area Mode Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected e Single point AF Select the focus point as described on page 96 the camera will focus on the subject in the selected focus point only Use with stationary subjects e Dynamic area AF Select the focus point as described on page 96 In AF A and AF C focus modes the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point The number of focus points varies with the mode selected 9 point dynamic area AF Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving predictably e g runners or race cars on a track 21 point dynamic area AF Choose when photographing subjects that are moving unpredictably e g players at a football game 39 point dynamic area AF Choose
210. iew when the camera is not use Note that the temperature of the camera s internal circuits may rise and noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be displayed in the following instances the camera may also become noticeably warm but this does not indicate a malfunction e The ambient temperature is high e The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to record movies e The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended periods If a warning is displayed when you attempt to start live view wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically Q 49 the timer turns red 5 s before the expiry of the time selected Monitor off delay gt Live view M 215 or if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected Note that although the count down does not appear during playback live view will still end automatically when the timer expires Manual Focus To focus in manual focus mode M 99 rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is in focus To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 6 7 X for precise focus press the amp button While the view through the lens is zoomed in a navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display Use
211. ighlight it and press Qa amp J button 176 4 Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog will be displayed T Delete highlight Yes and press 8 gt EE Select Date Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date 1 Choose Select date ma Delete In the delete menu highlight Select date and press P gt Manse ALLAI 2 Highlight a date a Use the multi selector to highlight a date _ O 16 04 2010 y 18 04 2010 t E Confirm To view the pictures taken on the highlighted date press 9 Use the multi selector to scroll through the pictures or press and hold amp to view the current picture full screen Press 9 to return to the date T 15 04 2010 a A ss Ro al ey ey pes Back Zoom Ok Set py Select date ne 9 list QE button 3 Select the highlighted date Bee at z Press to select all pictures taken on the EQN highlighted date Selected dates are marked B i ta DeZOND with aM icon Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select e additional dates to deselect a date highlight it and press gt Confirm 4 Press to complete the operation A confirmation dialog will be displayed F gt Delete all images taken on highlight Yes and press 8 onal Yes OK 177 178 Connections Connecting to a Computer This section describes how to use the supplied UC E4 USB cable to connect the camera to a computer Before Connecting the Camera
212. il num rique de la classe B est Canadian ICES 003 conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada Notices for Customers in Europe CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS This symbol indicates that this This symbol on the battery indicates product is to be collected that the battery is to be collected separately separately The following apply only to usersin EEEE The following apply only to users in European countries European countries e This product is designated for separate e All batteries whether marked with this collection at an appropriate collection symbol or not are designated for separate point Do not dispose of as household collection at an appropriate collection waste point Do not dispose of as household e For more information contact the retaileror waste the local authorities in charge of waste e For more information contact the retailer or management the local authorities in charge of waste management Notices for Customers in the U S A Power Cable At voltages over AC 125 V U S A only The power cable must be rated for the voltage in use be at least AWG no 18 gauge and have SVG insulation or better with a NEMA 6P 15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
213. illumination for autofocus SB 800 SB 600 and SU 800 With 24 105 mm AF lenses AF assist illumination is available only with g the focus points shown at right 35 49mm 50 105 mm SB 700 AF assist illumination is available for all 00000000000 focus points with 24 135 mm AF lenses S however autofocus is available only with the 24 135 mm focus points shown at right if other focus points are selected the AF assist illuminator may not provide sufficient illumination for autofocus D m ong oo0o0 279 280 Other Accessories At the time of writing the following accessories were available for the D7000 Power sources Wireless LAN adapters Filters Rechargeable Li ion Battery EN EL15 N 21 24 Additional EN EL15 batteries are available from local retailers and Nikon authorized service representatives Battery Charger MH 25 M 21 Recharge EN EL15 batteries Multi Power Battery Pack MB D11 The MB D11 is equipped with a shutter release button AE AF lock button multi selector and main and sub command dials for improved operation when taking photographs in portrait tall orientation When attaching the MB D11 remove the camera MB D11 contact cover Power Connector EP 5B AC Adapter EH 5a These accessories can be used to power the camera for extended periods EH 5 AC adapters can also be used The EP 5B is required to connect the camera to the EH 5a see page 282 for details Note that when the camera is used
214. images or Select protected images To mark only individually selected images for copying choose Deselect all before proceeding Select additional images Highlight pictures and press 9 to select or deselect to view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the amp button Selected images are marked with av Press to proceed to Step 7 when your selection is complete Choose Select destination folder Highlight Select destination folder and press gt gy Copy image s DY Select image s 2 100D7000 gt p Copy image s Default image selection y Deselect all gt Select all images E Select protected images ga Deselect all 3 12 y fre Ask fe 100 4 100 5 100 6 CHN COV AY a 1 010 4 py Copy image s Select source i Select image s 100 Sel Select destination folder 102 gt Copy image s 8 Select a destination folder To enter a folder number choose Select ma Cony image s folder by number enter the number Ocoee 203 and press 68 If the folder with the i ai selected number does not already exist a new folder will be created 100 999 Move Set WOK To choose from a list of existing folders wey Cony image s Select folder from list choose Select folder from list highlight a 10007000 10107000 folder and press 6 Y 10207000 103D7000 9 Copy the images Highlight Copy image s and press 6 ma Copy image s Y Select sou
215. in 1 Choose a start option E mage Dust Off ref photo Highlight one of the following options and press z To exit without acquiring image dust off data YE press MENU E Clean sensor and then start e Start The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the ae RTE viewfinder and control panel displays ee e Clean sensor and then start Select this option to Focus will be set to infinity clean the image sensor before starting The message shown at right will be displayed and rEF will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays when cleaning is complete Le m Image Sensor Cleaning Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Select Clean sensor and then start only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing photographs 2 Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder With the lens about ten centimeters four inches from a well lit featureless white object frame the object so that it fills the viewfinder and then press the shutter release button halfway In autofocus mode focus will automatically be set to infinity in manual focus mode set focus to infinity manually 240 3 Acquire dust off reference data Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutt
216. in select i My Menu for Recent settings gt Choose tab Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the recent settings menu highlight it and press the 7 button A 268 confirmation dialog will be displayed press again to delete the selected item Technical Notes Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories cleaning and storing the camera and what to do if an error message is displayed or you encounter problems using the camera Compatible Lenses CPU lenses particularly types G and D are recommended but note that IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring The maximum aperture of the lens is given by the f number in the lens name CPU contacts Aperture ring CPU lens a Type G lens Type D lens EE Compatible CPU Lenses Camera setting Focus I es M ee electronic Auto ep scene rangefinder modes P S A aes a Lens accessory Type G or D AF NIKKOR AF S AF I NIKKOR Y WY W WY WY ev PC E NIKKOR series I e e PC Micro 85mm f 28D A e AA AF S AF I teleconverter v v v v A A v Other AF NIKKOR except lenses for F3AF Y v W v Wi v v AL NIKKOR A ve v y vevi 1 Vibration Reduction VR supported with VR 6 With maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 o
217. ings Filter Effects Monochrome Only The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs The following filter effects are available Option Description Y Enhances contrast Can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in 0 landscape photographs Orange produces more contrast than yellow red R Red more contrast than orange G Softens skin tones Can be used for portraits Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters Toning Monochrome Only Pressing V when Toning is selected displays saturation options E Monochrome Press lt or gt to adjust saturation Saturation control is not available KENTI when B amp W black and white is selected E Filter effects e Cyanotype 4 a aGrid ONOK Reset 135 Creating Custom Picture Controls The Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be modified and saved as custom Picture Controls 1 Select Manage Picture Control MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button T5 Highlight Manage Picture Control in the a SHOOTING MENU a White balance AUTO1 A Set Picture Control FISD AY Ss shooting menu and press gt Auto distortion control Ge Color space T Active D Lighting Long exp NR EJ High ISO NR SO QUAL 2 Select Save edit fy Manage Picture Control Highlight Save edit and
218. ings are more likely to be subject to noise randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines See Also For information on choosing the ISO sensitivity step size see Custom Setting b1 ISO sensitivity step value N 211 For information on using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities see page 205 The Shooting Menu ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity D SHOOTING MENU P Active D Lighting OFF settings option in the shooting menu M 202 7 Long exp NR ace High ISO NR NORM 7 4 Multiple exposure OFF T Movie settings i Interval timer shooting OFF EJ Remote control mode G 2s Auto ISO Sensitivity Control P S A and M Modes Only If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user ISO sensitivity is adjusted appropriately when the flash is used 1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control MENU button Press the MENU button and select ISO E SHOOTING MENU saei on Active D Lighti OFF sensitivity settings in the shooting menu a Lons e NR OFF Highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control and E E Iso oi press gt Multiple exposure Ly Movie settings Interval timer shooting EJ Remote control mode 2 Select On 5 1S0 sensitivity settings Highlight On and pr
219. ion Focus point selection wraps around from top to afaa bottom bottom to top right to left and left to right ao 30 so that for example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display The focus area display is bounded by the outermost focus points so that for No wrap example pressing when a focus point at the right edge of the display is selected has no effect Wrap 209 a6 Number of Focus Points MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the number of focus points available for manual focus point selection Option Description aod 000ooo00 OO AF39 39 points Choose from the 39 focus points shown at right Seno28nocae OO oo0000000000 V00 AF11 11 points quick focus point selection Choose from the 11 focus points shown at right Use for fo 8 D O D a7 Built in AF assist Illuminator MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose whether the built in AF assist illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor Option Description The AF assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor viewfinder photography only AF assist illumination is only available when both of the following conditions are met On 1 AF S is selected for autofocus mode M 91 or single servo autofocus is selected when the camera is in AF A mode 2
220. is In self timer mode M 80 the number of copies specified in the white balance program will be created each time the shutter is released regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots V 214 If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded 113 BE ADL Bracketing The camera varies Active D Lighting over a series of exposures For more information on Active D Lighting see page 139 1 Select ADL bracketing GS e5 Auto bracketing set Choose ADL bracketing for Custom Setting e5 Auto CTET bracketing set F AE AE only E E O i WB WB bracketing 5 amp ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence Choose two shots to take one photograph with Active D Lighting off and another at the value currently selected for Active D Lighting in the shooting menu if Active D Lighting is off the second shot will be taken with Active D Lighting set to Auto Choose three shots to take a series of photographs with Active D Lighting set to Off Normal and High Number of shots J GF Bracketing progress BKT button Main command dial Control panel indicator BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see right the control panel wi
221. is in less than a minute a warning will be displayed in the monitor Out of Memory If the memory card is full the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be taken Resume shooting M 158 after deleting some pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card Cover the Viewfinder To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap 81 Release Mode Regardless of the release mode selected the camera will take the specified number of shots at each interval In Cu continuous high speed mode photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 6 shots per second In S single frame and C continuous low speed modes photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed M 217 in mode Q camera noise will be reduced Bracketing Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography If exposure flash or ADL bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval regardless of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu If white balance bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect the camera will take one shot at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program During
222. is in malfunction the product should be or close to the frame could cause a fire repaired only by a qualified technician Should the product break open as the result of a fall or other accident remove the battery and or AC adapter and then take the product to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Do not look at the sun through the viewfinder Viewing the sun or other strong light source through the viewfinder could cause permanent visual impairment Using the viewfinder diopter adjustment control When operating the viewfinder diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder care should be taken not to put your finger in your eye accidentally Do not place the strap around the neck of an infant or child Placing the camera strap around the neck of an infant or child could result in strangulation Z Turn off immediately in the event of malfunction Should you notice smoke or an unusual smell coming from the equipment or AC adapter available separately unplug the AC adapter and remove the battery immediately taking care to avoid burns Continued operation could result in injury After removing the battery take the equipment to a Nikon authorized service center for inspection Z Observe caution when using the flash e Using the camera with the flash in close contact with the skin or other objects could cause burns e Using the flash close to the subject s eyes could cause temporary visual i
223. ithium ion battery Rated capacity 7 0 V 1900 mAh Dimensions W x H x D Approx 40 x 56 x 20 5 mm 1 6 x 2 2 x 0 8 in Weight Approx 88 g 3 1 oz excluding terminal cover AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens Type Type G AF S DX NIKKOR zoom lens with built in CPU and F mount for use exclusively with Nikon DX format digital SLR cameras Focal length 18 105mm Maximum aperture f 3 5 5 6 Lens construction 15 elements in 11 groups including 1 aspherical element and 1 ED glass element Angle of view 76 15 20 Focal length scale Graduated in millimeters 18 24 35 50 70 105 Distance information Output to camera Zoom Manual zoom using independent zoom ring Focusing Nikon Internal Focusing IF system with autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor manual focus supported when A M switch is set to A or M Focus can be adjusted by rotating lens focus ring while focus is locked in single servo autofocus Do not use focus ring while camera is focusing Vibration reduction Lens shift method using voice coil motors VCMs Minimum focus distance 0 45 m 1 5 ft from focal plane mark QQ 100 at all zoom positions Diaphragm blades 7 rounded diaphragm opening Diaphragm Fully automatic Aperture range e 18mm focal length f 3 5 22 e 105 mm focal length f 5 6 38 Metering Full aperture Filter attachment size 67 mm P 0 75 mm Dimensions Approx 76 mm diameter x 89 mm 3 0 x 3 5 in distance from camera lens mount flan
224. ive purposes Cowes E monitor is shown with all r ISO a be A N indicators displayed Item Description aa 1 Shooting mode The mode currently selected with the mode dial 6 2 No movie icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded 57 3 a Indicates whether sound is being recorded with movies 60 _ The amount of time remaining before live view ends Time remaining automatically Displayed if shooting will end in 30 s or less 5 AF mode The current autofocus mode 50 6 AF areamode The current AF area mode 50 The current focus point The display varies with the option selected for AF area mode C1 50 ae en The recording time remaining in movie mode 58 9 Movie quality The frame size and quality of movies recorded in movie mode 60 7 Focus point Displayed while the 2 button is pressed keep the button 40 pronto pressed and press A or F to adjust brightness this applies to brightness the monitor only exposure is not affected 49 2 Choose a focus mode Focus mode selector To choose an autofocus mode rotate the focus mode selector to AF and then press the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is displayed in the monitor Mode Description Single servo AF For stationary subjects Focus locks AF mode Main command dial when shutter release button is pressed halfway button Full time servo AF For moving
225. l Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities Use the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to reduce noise see page 205 When a flash is used the value selected for Minimum shutter speed is ignored in favor of the option selected for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 222 Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes available with the built in flash and SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 and SB 400 flash units possibly preventing the camera from selecting slow shutter speeds 104 Exposure Bracketing M ete ri n g P S A and M Modes Only Choose how the camera sets exposure in P S A and M modes in other modes the camera selects the metering method automatically Option PN Description Matrix Produces natural results in most situations Camera meters a wide area of the frame and set exposure according to tone distribution color composition and with type G or D lenses M 269 distance information 3D color matrix metering II with other CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering II which does not include 3D distance information With non CPU lenses camera uses color matrix metering if focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non CPU lens data option in setup menu M 159 otherwise camera uses center weighted metering Center weighted Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to center ar
226. l panel in place of the number of exposures remaining Device Control See the television manual for details 194 Menu Guide gt The Playback Menu Managing Images To display the playback menu press MENU and select the P playback menu tab MENU button PLAYBACK MENU Delete Playback folder Pl PLAYBACK MENU A Playback folder D7000 gt Hide image NS gt Hide image ie Display mode K A gt _ Display mode lt OS S Z 4 Copy image s Copy image s gt Laer After delete KA Ly Image review OFF After delete Chip El Rotate tall OFF El Rotate tall The playback menu contains the following options Option aa Option AR Delete 176 Image review 200 Playback folder 195 After delete 200 Hide image 196 Rotate tall 200 Display mode 197 Slide show 201 Copy image s 197 Print set DPOF 189 Playback Folder MENU button gt gt playback menu Choose a folder for playback 1 163 Option Description D7000 Pictures in all folders created with the D7000 will be visible during playback All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Current Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback 195 Hide Image MENU button gt 1 playback menu Hide or reveal pictures Hidden pictures are visible only in the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the memory card Option Description Select set Hide or
227. lay Image Sensor Cleaning The camera vibrates the low pass filter covering the image sensor to remove dust when the camera is turned on or off Q 284 35 3 Check the number of exposures remaining The control panel and viewfinder show the number of photographs that can be taken at current settings values over 1 000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred e g values between 1 200 and 1 299 are shown as 1 2 K If two memory cards are inserted the displays show the space available on the card in Slot 1 M 30 When the number of exposures remaining reaches 4 the number will flash F wi or Fut will blink in the shutter speed displays and the icon for the affected card will blink Insert another memory card Q 29 or delete some photos 1 47 175 Camera Off Display If the camera is turned off with a battery and memory card inserted the memory card icon and number of exposures remaining will be displayed some memory cards may in rare cases only display this information when the camera is on Control panel Step 2 Select amp or Mode To shoot where use of a flash is prohibited Mode dial photograph infants or capture natural lighting under P N low light conditions rotate the mode dial to AUTO Otherwise rotate the mode dial to a amp mode 36 Step 3 Frame the Photograph 1 Ready the camera When framing photographs in the viewfinder hold the handgrip in your right hand a
228. le for download from Nikon websites The Picture Control Indicator The current Picture Control is shown in the information display when the i button is pressed 27 ity somN m sRGB D omor s0 en A Dm Picture Control indicator Modifying Picture Controls Existing preset or custom Picture Controls M 136 can be modified to suit the scene or the user s creative REECE 7 y arpening intent Choose a balanced combination of settings T contrast gt E4 Brightness using Quick adjust or make manual adjustments to fe Saturation Hue individual settings a Gcd GOK Reset 1 Select a Picture Control Gi Sst Pte Cont Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Set cat tea m Picture Control menu M 131 and press gt gt F EMC Monochrome SA PT Portrait E FILS Landscape Grid Adiust 2 Adjust settings B Vivid Press A or W to highlight the desired setting and gt Sinaia a press lt or P to choose a value HI 134 Repeat lt a gt B aa m this step until all settings have been adjusted or E Saturation select Quick adjust to choose a preset Coy iS combination of settings Default settings can be restored by pressing the T button 3 Save changes and exit Press Modifications to Original Picture Controls Picture Controls that have been modified from default E Set Picture Control settings are indicated by an asterisk jy Give SA PT Portrait E FILS Landscape
229. lect new photos or adjust gain press Qe 6 Save the overlay Press k while the preview is displayed to save the overlay After an overlay is created the resulting image will be displayed full frame in the monitor 1 100D7000 DSC_0007 NEF TRAW 15 04 2010 19 34 31 4928x3264 v Image Overlay The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture shooting mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation white balance and Picture Control as Image 1 The current image comment is appended to the overlay copyright information however is not copied NEF RAW overlays use the compression selected for Type in the NEF RAW recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original images JPEG overlays are saved using size priority compression 257 NEF RAW Processing MENU button gt g retouch menu Create JPEG copies of NEF RAW photographs 258 1 Select NEF RAW processing TOKINA Highlight NEF RAW processing in the retouch gt Redeye correction menu and press P to display a picture selection C4 here dialog listing only NEF RAW images created with this camera 00 Y eae Selecta photograph E NEF RAW processing Highlight a photograph to view the highlighted 7 photograph full frame press and hold the amp pees KoM RA button to view images in other locations as described on page 164 hold BKT and press A Press to sele
230. ll be copied to the comment for the selected preset S Copy 4 0 ae d 1 EE Copying White Balance from a Photograph d 1 d 4 Only Copy a value for white balance from an existing image to a selected preset Note that existing values can not be copied to preset d 0 1 Select PRE Preset manual Bi Mite bane _ z incandescen Highlight Preset manual in the white my Fluorescent 3 Direct sunlight balance menu and press gt as Fash Cloudy E Shade KI Choose color temp ZIPRE Preset manul gt 2 Select a destination Highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 4 O E White balance and press Qe ye d 1 PRE Select k Set 126 3 Choose Select image Bi Whitebalance Highlight Select image and press gt 5 L d 1 Set Edit comment E Select image gt Copy d0 4 Highlight a source image piine oo o oo o elect image na Highlight the source image gt Y Oe 100 2 Fest io 100 4 100 5 100 6 Zoom OROK To view the highlighted image full frame Q button press and hold the amp button O E White balance To view images in other locations hold BKT and press A The dialog shown at right will be displayed select the desired card and folder M 164 BKT button Playback slot and folder Slot 1 gt Slot 2 EE 5 Copy white balance Press to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted
231. ll show mema 114 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary Active D Lighting shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot the E segment when the first shot is taken the segment when the second shot is taken and the segment when the third shot if applicable is taken He 6 To cancel bracketing press the BKT button and rotate the main command dial until the bracketing progress indicator and icon are no longer displayed ADL Bracketing In continuous low speed and continuous high speed release modes M 78 shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode the camera will take the number of shots selected in Step 2 on page 114 each time the shutter release button is pressed regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer gt Number of shots M 214 In other release modes one shot will be taken each time the shutter release button is pressed If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memor
232. ly Highlight Image overlay in the retouch menu Ei imase 1 imase2 Preview and press The dialog shown at right will be displayed with Image 1 highlighted press to E display a list of the NEF pictures created with this g cdd camera 2 Select the first image EE Use the multi selector to highlight a photo To p Ea j view the highlighted image full frame press and 100 fees ey hold the amp button to view images in other E locations as described on page 164 hold BKT and ee press A Press to select the highlighted photograph and return to the preview display 3 Select the second image The selected image will appear as Image 1 Highlight Image 2 and press 6 then select the second photo as described in Step 2 Choose an image with the same bit depth as the photo selected for Image 1 256 4 Adjust gain E mage overlay Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing A or W to select gain from values between 0 1 and 2 0 Repeat for the second image The default value is aioe eae 1 0 select 0 5 to halve gain or 2 0 to double it The effects are visible in the Preview column 5 Preview the overlay Image overlay J e Overlay Press lt or P to place the cursor in the Preview column and press A or to highlight Overlay Press to preview the overlay as shown at right to save the overlay without displaying a preview ED 7 a select Save To return to Step 4 and se
233. mber of photographs that can be recorded at current settings 32 The Write Protect Switch Memory cards are equipped with a write protect switch to BZ revent accidental loss of data When this switch is in the lt e j al lock position the memory card can not be formatted and photos can not be deleted or recorded a warning will Write protect switch be displayed in the monitor if you attempt to release the shutter To unlock the memory card slide the switch to the write position See Also See page 236 for information on formatting memory cards using the Format memory card option in the setup menu 33 34 Adjust Viewfinder Focus The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate individual differences in vision Check that the display in the viewfinder is in focus before framing pictures in the viewfinder 1 Remove the lens cap 2 Turn the camera on 3 Focus the viewfinder Rotate the diopter adjustment control until the AF area brackets are in sharp focus When operating the diopter adjustment control with your eye to the viewfinder be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye AF area brackets Adjusting Viewfinder Focus If you are unable to focus the viewfinder as described above select single servo autofocus AF S M 91 single point AF 1 94 and the center focus point 1 96 and then frame a high contrast subject in the center focus point and press
234. me and press the shutter release button halfway to focus 4 Lock flash level After confirming that the flash ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder press the Fn button The flash will emit a monitor preflash to determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will be locked at this level and FV lock icons m will appear in the viewfinder 3Assign Fn button Preview i y ENV o CR a AE AF lock Uf AE lock only 183 AE lock Hold tf AF lock only Flash off EJ BKI Bracketing burst Fn button 149 150 5 Recompose the photograph 6 Take the photograph Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock 7 Release FV lock Press the Fn button to release FV lock Confirm that the FV lock icon mm is no longer displayed in the viewfinder Using FV Lock with the Built in Flash FV lock is only available with the built in flash when TTL is selected for Custom Setting e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash N 223 Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units FV lock is also available with SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 and SB R200 flash units available separately Set the optional flash to TTL mode the SB 900 and SB 800 can also be used in AA mode see the flash manual for details While FV lock is in effect flash output will automatically be adjuste
235. mpairment Particular care should be observed when photographing infants when the flash should be no less than one meter 39 in from the subject Z Do not use in the presence of flammable gas Do not use electronic equipment in the presence of flammable gas as this could result in explosion or fire Avoid contact with liquid crystal Should the monitor break care should be taken to avoid injury due to broken glass and to prevent the liquid crystal from the Keep out of reach of children monitor touching the skin or entering the Failure to observe this precaution could eyes or mouth result in injury Observe proper precautions when handling batteries Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled Observe the following precautions when handling batteries for use in this product e Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment e Do not short or disassemble the battery e Be sure the product is off before replacing the battery If you are using an AC adapter be sure it is unplugged e Do not attempt to insert the battery upside down or backwards e Do not expose the battery to flame or to excessive heat e Do not immerse in or expose to water e Replace the terminal cover when transporting the battery Do not transport or store the battery with metal objects such as necklaces or hairpins e Batteries are prone to leakage when fully discharged To avoid damage to the product be sure to remove
236. n at default settings once every 30 s flash fired once every other shot Live view not used 2 Measured at 20 C 68 F with an AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II lens under the following test conditions image quality set to JPEG basic image size set to M medium shutter speed 1 250 s shutter release button pressed halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off cycle repeated once exposure meters have turned off The following can reduce battery life e Using the monitor e Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway e Repeated autofocus operations e Taking NEF RAW photographs e Slow shutter speeds e Using the optional WT 4 wireless transmitter e Using a GP 1 GPS unit e Using VR vibration reduction mode with VR lenses To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN EL15 batteries e Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance e Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused 321 322 Index Symbols S Single frame c ececesseeseeees 7 77 CL Continuous low speed 7 77 78 217 CH Continuous high speed 7 77 78 Q Quiet shutter release 7 77 Self timer cecesseessesseessee 7 77 80 w Remote control 7 77 80 MupP Mirro
237. n authorization from NIKON CORPORATION CE NIKON CORPORATION Printed in Thailand 2010 Nikon Corporation 6MB10011 02
238. n control see page 205 Press to reduce barrel distortion lt to reduce pin cushion distortion note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy iV Auto Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G and D lenses PC fisheye and certain other lenses excluded Results are not guaranteed with other lenses Fisheye MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create copies that appear to have been taken with a fisheye lens Press to increase the effect this also increases the amount of that will be cropped out at the edges of the image lt q to reduce it Press to copy the photograph or press gt to exit to playback without creating a copy 261 262 Color Outline MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create an outline copy of a photograph to use as a base for painting The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press to copy the photograph Before Color Sketch MENU button gt gh retouch menu Create a copy of a photograph that resembles a sketch made Color sketch with colored pencils Press A or F to highlight Vividness or Outlines and press lt or gt to change Vividness can be increased to make colors more saturated or decreased for a Vividness F washed out monochromatic effect while outlines can be made see TT thicker or thinner T
239. n display M 165 Press A or W to highlight an peepee option then press to select the option for the photo EAST information display A Y appears next to selected items to je Highlights M RGB histogram M Data deselect highlight and press To return to the playback menu highlight Done and press 6 Copy Image s MENU button gt gt playback menu Copy images between memory cards This option is only available when two memory cards are inserted in the camera Option Description Select source Select the card from which pictures will be copied Select image s Select the pictures to be copied Select destination folder Select the folder to which pictures will be copied Copy image s Copy the images To copy images 1 Choose Select source a Copy image s Highlight Select source and press P Select source Select image s CA E 2 Select the source card um Covi Highlight the slot containing the card from 5 which images will be copied and press W ims wy E A Slot2 3 Choose Select image s wey Copy image s Highlight Select image s and press P Select source i Y Select image s gt t E 197 198 Select the source folder Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press gt Make the initial selection Before going on select or deselect individual images you can mark all or all protected images in the folder for copying by choosing Select all
240. nals with your fingers or metal objects Do not bend drop or subject to strong physical shocks Do not apply force to the card casing Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not expose to water heat high levels of humidity or direct sunlight 31 Format the Memory Card Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being used or formatted in other devices Y Formatting Memory Cards Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer before proceeding M 179 1 Turn the camera on 2 Press the buttons fi button 3 button Hold the f and 3 buttons down simultaneously until a blinking F a r appears in the shutter speed displays in the control panel and viewfinder If two memory cards are inserted the card in Slot 1 M 30 will be selected you can choose the card in Slot 2 by rotating the main command dial To exit without formatting the memory card wait until F ar stops blinking about six seconds or press any button other than the f and 3 buttons 3 Press the buttons again Press the t and 3 buttons together a second time while F a r is blinking to format the memory card Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting When formatting is complete the control panel and viewfinder will show the nu
241. nd the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the amp button pressed press A or to specify the number of prints up to 99 to deselect the picture press W when the number of prints is 1 Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected 18754 2010 to 02 27 3 Display imprint options ma Pint set OPOP Press to display data imprint options Done O Data imprint mo Imprint date 189 190 4 Select imprint options ma Print set DPOF T Select set Highlight the following options and press gt to toggle the highlighted option on or off to Done complete the print order without including a this information proceed to Step 5 7 e Data imprint Print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order e Imprint date Print date of recording on all pictures in print order 5 Complete the print order ma Print set DPOF DY Select set Highlight Done and press to complete 7 the print order WT Done Data imprint E m Imprint date V Print Set DPOF To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer select Print DPOF in the PictBridge menu and follow the steps in Printing Multiple Pictures to modify and print the current order M 185 DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported when printing via direct USB connection to print the date of recording on photographs in the current print order
242. nd cradle the camera body or lens with your left Keep your elbows propped lightly against your torso for support and place one foot half a pace ahead of the other to keep your upper body stable Hold the camera as shown at right when framing photographs in portrait tall orientation In mode shutter speeds slow when lighting is poor use of a tripod is recommended 2 Frame the photograph Frame a photograph in the viewfinder with the main subject in the AF area brackets Using a Zoom Lens Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject so that it fills a larger area of the frame or zoom out to increase the area visible in the final photograph select longer focal lengths on the lens focal length scale to zoom in shorter focal lengths to zoom out The AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR In the case of the AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR 315 316 changes to zoom can alter maximum Zoom out aperture by up to 11 3 EV The camera however automatically takes this into account when setting exposure and no modifications to camera settings are required following adjustments to zoom 37 38 Step 4 Focus 1 Press the shutter release button halfway Press the shutter release button halfway to focus The active focus point will be displayed If the subject is poorly lit the flash may pop up and the AF assist illuminator may light lt ii 2 Check the indicators in the viewfinde
243. nd i buttons together for about two seconds during playback 174 Deleting Photographs To delete the photograph displayed in full frame playback or the photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list press the 1T button To delete multiple selected photographs all photographs taken on a selected date or all photographs in the current playback folder use the Delete option in the playback menu Once deleted photographs can not be recovered Full Frame Thumbnail and Calendar Playback Press the 1 button to delete the current photograph 1 Select an image Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar playback 2 Press the button A confirmation dialog will be displayed Calendar playback t button Full frame playback Thumbnail playback thumbnail list 2010 4 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sa 4 TN 4a mj Delete By Oe i 25 26 2 Cancel i DA EF Zoom 1 Delete SS i 100D7000 DSC_0001 JPG NORMAL 15 04 2010 10 02 27 4928x3264 3 Press the f button again i button To delete the photograph press the 1 button again To exit without deleting the photograph press the gt button Calendar Playback During calendar playback you can delete all photographs taken on a selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the t button QI 172 See Also The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the
244. nder certain conditions To protect the camera when no lens is in place be sure to replace the body cap provided with the camera being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the body cap Avoid exchanging lenses in dusty environments Should foreign matter find its way onto the low pass filter clean the filter as described above or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 available separately A 281 or the clean image options available in some third party imaging applications Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions Do not drop The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or vibration Keep dry This product is not waterproof and may malfunction if immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage Avoid sudden changes in temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep away from strong magnetic fields Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields Str
245. ng Q 77 Mode ie Cy Single frame ss Ee CL Continuous low speed a Ee i ERP Q Quiet shutter release Es ir X Self timer ga E Remote control Ee MUP Mirror up an H Continuous high speed Description One photograph is taken each time the shutter release button is pressed The camera takes photographs at about 1 to 5 frames per second while the shutter release button is pressed The camera takes photographs at up to 6 frames per second while the shutter release button is pressed As for single frame except that camera noise is reduced Take pictures with the self timer Take pictures with an optional ML L3 remote control Raise the mirror before taking photographs The Control Panel 1 Color temperature indicator esesseseseeeeeees 122 Shutter speed sse ssssessssessssesssssesssecesssersssersssee 69 71 Exposure compensation value ccscseseseeees 107 Flash compensation VAIUC cscseceseeseeeeseeees 148 White balance fine tuning sss sessssssessssseerss 120 Color temperature eesececseseeseseesecseseeseeeseesees 122 White balance preset numbet 04 123 128 Number of shots in bracketing sequence PE E EET E E 109 112 114 Number of intervals for interval timer photography sssesriirirsssiersiiissrsierieinisierniiisisissssessis 156 Focal length non CPU lenses sssssesssssssesss 159 17 25 18 6
246. ng that will be used in final photo and white balance measured by camera M 124 Use photo White balance is copied from photo on memory card M 126 Measure The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets d 0 through d 4 A descriptive comment can be added to any white balance preset M 129 d 0 Stores last value measured for white balance 1 124 This preset is overwritten when a new ps White balance value is measured d 1 d 4 Store values copied from d 0 M 126 Store values copied from images on memory card M 126 es White balance a rs s is 00 4 E 00 5 A 00 6 Zoom OROK PRE Select RSet 123 EE Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance 124 1 Light a reference object Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring white balance in mode M adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 M 72 Set white balance to PRE Preset manual Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until PRE is displayed in the control panel WB button Main command dial Control panel Select direct measurement mode Release the WB button briefly and then press the button until the PRE icon in the control panel starts to flash A
247. nly if GPS device was used when photo was taken M 162 data for movies are for start of recording 169 170 Hi Overview Data i IA P 1 8000 F4 8 E3100 4 1 3 H4 1 0 ONO GPS EN Frame number total number of images Protect status ssseesessessssessesessesossessesessesessesosses 174 Camera name Retouch indicator cccccssecsecssessecssessecssessessecssecseeess 248 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the image 1 167 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on 17 18 35 110000 CAB6 m1 sRGB EASD BSL i 0007000 DSC_0001 JPG 04 2010 10 02 27 492813264 24 23 22 21 20 Picture Control 131 18 Active D LIGhting itsssssssssssssssssssessssssssssesssssssseeen 139 6 ISO sensitivity assssccsssscsseossssssersssessrsssssssesrasesser 101 Focal length wecssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessees 159 274 8 GPS data indicator ssssssssssssssssessssrssssrresssressssresss 162 9 Image COMMENT INGICATOL esesssssssssesssssseeeeseen 238 10 Flash MOC csssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssesssseseesse 144 g Flash compensation eeessssssessssssssesssssssssssssseeseeen 148 Commander MOAE ssssssssssssssssessssessssecsesecsesees 225 12 Exposure comMpensation ssessessessesseesessessesses 107 13 C 105 Shooting MOde s sssssssssssssesssresssresssrsssresseresssresseressn 6 15 Shutter Speed sssssssssssssrssssesessssssreesssen
248. no memory card icon will be displayed in the viewfinder screen while the battery has charge remaining even when the camera is off Removing Memory Cards After confirming that the access lamp is off turn the camera off open the memory card slot cover and press the card in to eject it The card can then be removed by hand Using Two Memory Cards Slot 1 is for the main card the card in slot 2 plays a backup or secondary role If the default setting of Overflow is selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 M 89 when two memory cards are inserted the card in slot 2 will only be used when the card in slot 1 is full The control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory card the example at right shows the icons displayed when a card is inserted in each slot If the memory card is full or locked or an error has occurred the icon for the affected card will blink 2 307 P dS 56 E2 wo SOMN oF sRGB eA Omir E0 m e 0a Information display m Memory Cards Memory cards may be hot after use Observe due caution when removing memory cards from the camera Do not remove memory cards from the camera turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are being recorded deleted or copied to a computer Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera or card Do not touch the card termi
249. nt Create a copy from which the ending footage has been removed Save selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still Trimming Movies To create trimmed copies of movies 1 Display a movie full frame D button Press the gt button to display pictures full p frame in the monitor and press lt and P to scroll through pictures until the movie you wish to edit is displayed 1 100D7000 DSC_0013 MOV 15 04 2010 12 50 00 2 Choosea starting or end point Play the movie back as described on page 62 pressing to start and resume playback and to pause If you intend to trim the opening footage from the copy pause on the first frame you wish to keep if you will be editing out the ending footage pause on the last frame you wish to keep Starting and Ending Frames The first frame is shown by a H the final frame by a icon ae 63 3 Display the retouch menu Edit movie Press to display the retouch menu SS Choose start point JX Choose end point amp Save selected frame Cancel Yom button 4 Choose an option Edit movie To create a copy that includes the current Bl Choose start point H J Ch d point frame and all following frames highlight Choose start point in the edit movie menu and press 68 Select Choose end point to Cancel create a copy that includes the current frame and all preceding frames 5 Delete frames xt KEE Press A
250. nting Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before all copies have Description Menu of page sizes will be displayed 1 184 options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or W to choose page size to print at default page size for current printer select Printer default then press 0 to select and return to previous menu Menu of border options will be displayed 1 184 options not supported by current printer are not listed Press A or W to choose print style from Printer default print at current printer settings Print with border print photo with white border or No border then press to select and return to previous menu Menu of time stamp options will be displayed M 184 Press A or W to choose Printer default print at current printer settings Print time stamp print time and date of recording on photo or No time stamp then press to select and return to previous menu been printed press Errors See page 308 for information on what to do if an error occurs during printing 187 Creating Index Prints To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card select Index print in Step 2 of Printing Multiple Pictures M 185 Note that if the memory card contains more than 256 pictures only the first 256 images will be printed 1 Select Index print a Index print Selecting Index print in the PictBridge menu 1 185 displays the image
251. ntroOl sessssesssesssessseesscessesssessseesssesssesseeese 131 3 5 SAN See Oey Quick adjust a cnsds Scvscensceasciecuccssestecscpscesssnseclcuntets 134 g m AE L K Original Picture Control 3 wu 137 6 eA i Sharpening rtatetentaeeaienanneniodaens 134 3 H BRI GiTHESs 8 Contrast orale detested 134 11 F 9 Bia CSS 8 issii 134 NV K Saturi NOn nanan 134 NIKON D7000 Filter effects gt isiin 134 HUET esc ctcinieeeteciactices OT 134 7 Protect Status cccrsaciarteessasccrsesrecnteakenuanen 174 K TONING Dvssssessesscsssssssssssssssssssssssssscsssssssssssssseseess 134 135 Retouch indicator s ssssssssssssssrssssesssrssereseresees 248 12 Camera name White balance iatenmunidindniiondnn 117 13 Folder number frame number sssr 218 Color temperature ssessssesssesssesssessseesssesseesseesse 122 White balance fine tuning ssss sesssseesssssees 119 Preset ManUal sssessseesseesseessessessseesssessscoseeeseee 123 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode C1 197 2 Standard Vivid Portrait and Landscape Picture Controls only 3 Neutral Monochrome and custom Picture Controls 4 Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls 5 Monochrome Picture Controls only EE Shooting Data Page 3 HI TSO NORM H G NORMAL CYANOTYPE RIM T gt SPRING HAS COME SP RING HAS COME 3636 1 Protect Status vccccsssescssssessssssessssssssssssessssseessssseessn 174 Retou
252. ntrol panel 15 Select bracketing increment mode P S A or M 1110 112 HE White Balance Choose a white balance option mode P S A or M Q 117 Fine tune white balance CO 120 set color temperature CQ 122 or choose a white balance preset M 128 in mode P S A or M EE Flash Settings Choose a flash mode M 144 Set flash compensation mode P S A or M CQ 148 16 WB button Main command dial Control panel WB button Je Le Sub command dial Control panel button Main command dial Control panel Sub command dial Control panel The BM 11 Monitor Cover A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean and protect it when the camera is not in use To attach the cover insert the projection on the top of the cover into the matching indentation above the camera monitor and press the bottom of the cover until it clicks into place To remove the cover hold the camera firmly and pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as shown at right 17 Camera Menus Most shooting playback and setup options can be accessed MENU button from the camera menus To view the menus press the MENU button Tabs Choose from the following menus e gt Playback 2 195 e T Setup Z 236 e Shooting 202 e Ki Retouch 248
253. nuous release mode for extended periods Ifa warning is displayed when you attempt to start live view or movie recording wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On is selected for Manual movie settings M 60 and the camera is in mode M The Count Down Display A count down will be displayed 30 s before movie recording ends automatically M 49 Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when movie recording begins Note that regardless of the amount of recording time available live view will still end automatically when the timer expires Wait for the internal circuits to cool before resuming movie recording 59 60 EE Movie Settings Use the Movie settings option in the shooting menu to choose movie quality sound destination and manual movie settings options e Movie quality Choose from frame sizes of i 1920 x 1080 20 1280 x 720 and 424 640 x 424 and from x high and normal quality The frame rate depends on the option currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu M 237 NTSC PAL Frame size pixels Maximum length 1920 x 1080 24 fps 24 24fps Choose from 24 l Choose ae 24 640 x 424 30 fps 25 25 fps Listed value Actual rate is 23 976 fps t Listed ae Actual rate is 29 97 fps e Microphone Turn the built in or external microphone on or off or to adjust microphone sensitivity Selecting Micro
254. o AF AF S or when single servo AF is selected for AF A 1 50 91 when focus locks in live view while the release timer is counting down in self timer and delayed remote release modes M 80 when a photograph is taken in quick response remote or remote mirror up mode M 80 or if you attempt to take a photograph when the memory card is locked M 33 Note that a beep will not sound in quiet shutter release mode mode Q M 77 regardless of the option selected e Volume Choose 3 high 2 medium 1 low or Off mute 530 When an option other than Off is selected appears in the MON control panel and information display e Pitch Choose High or Low F A 215 216 d2 Viewfinder Grid Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose On to display on demand grid lines in the viewfinder for BETIE reference when composing photographs M 9 d3 ISO Display and Adjustment MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If Show ISO sensitivity or Show ISO Easy ISO is selected the viewfinder and control panel will show ISO sensitivity in place of the number of exposures remaining If Show ISO Easy ISO is selected ISO sensitivity can be set in modes P and S by rotating the sub command dial or in mode A by rotating the main command dial Select Show frame count to display the number of exposures remaining in the viewfinder and control panel d4 Viewfinder Warning Display MENU button gt Custom Settings menu
255. o enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty six characters for a selected white balance preset 1 Select PRE Preset manual Highlight Preset manual in the white balance menu and press gt 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press Q amp s 3 Select Edit comment Highlight Edit comment and press gt 4 Edit the comment Edit the comment as described on page 137 RGE EG Incandescent x Fluorescent 3 Direct sunlight Flash Cloudy gt Shade Choose color temp 2i PRE Preset manual gt TRUE Z a i y ee T z m d 3 Ai E es White balance s Preset manual d 1 Set z i Select image Copy d 0 es White balance O 0123456789MBCDE FGHIJKLMNOPQRST UVWXYZabcdefghi Jklmnoparstuvwx Cursor OKInput JOK 129 130 Image Enhancement Picture Controls P S A and M Modes Only Nikon s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share image processing settings including sharpening contrast brightness saturation and hue among compatible devices and software Selecting a Picture Control The camera offers a choice of preset Picture Controls In P S A and M modes you can choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene in other modes the camera selects a Picture Control automatically Option Description Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations Minimal processing for natural
256. ock release and turn the release mode dial to CH or CL lA Y 5 FORMAT Release mode dial 2 Framea photograph focus and shoot While the shutter release button is pressed all the way down pictures will be taken at about 6 fps in continuous high speed mode or at the frame rate selected for Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed 217 in continuous low speed mode Frame rates may slow when the battery is low or vibration reduction or auto ISO sensitivity control M 103 is on The Memory Buffer The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession note however that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full While photographs are being recorded to the memory card the access lamp next to the memory card slot will light Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone out If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer the power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory card Buffer Size The a
257. ode in the shooting menu and press gt to display the following options Press the selector up or down to highlight an option and press auaL Option Description 7 Shutter is released 2 s after ML L3 shutter release button is g2s Delayed remote pressed 5 Quick response Shutter is released when ML L3 shutter release button is remote pressed Press ML L3 shutter release button once to raise mirror again to Remote Mu release shutter and take photograph Prevents blur caused by mirror up camera moving when mirror is raised 80 3 Frame the photograph Cover the Viewfinder When taking photos without youreye to DK 21 rubber eyecup DK 5 eyepiece cap the viewfinder remove the DK 21 rubber ial eyecup and insert the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap as shown This prevents light entering via the viewfinder interfering with exposure Hold the camera firmly when removing the rubber eyecup 4 Take the photograph Self timer mode Press the shutter release button halfway to focus and then press the button the rest of the way down to start the self timer note that the timer will not start if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in which the shutter can not be released The self timer lamp will start to blink Two seconds before the photograph is taken the self timer lamp will stop blinking The shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer starts Remote con
258. of two approximately 1 4 276 The following features are available with CLS compatible flash units Advanced Wireless Lighting _ Commander Remote SB 900 a 900 ne 900 SB 700 Flash mode feature SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 400 SB R200 VY HTL Mined vv vw ww cana M KAE aa o a a e e N panemon 7 l Kaa aca 7 erR SS e e a Auto FP High Speed Syme viv v v v wv e iy Fiod 7 AF assist for multi area AF p wlwYyl l lwivit wv Flash Color Information Communication Y Y WY YW v v REN 7 kederan v v v v v v HM Powerzoom Chel ee es ae 1 Only available when SU 800 is used to control other flash units 2 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected with flash unit 3 Standard i TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering 4 Selected with flash unit 5 Auto aperture AA is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit 6 Can be selected with camera 7 Select 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed M 222 8 CPU lens required Auto Aperture Non TTL Auto Unless the focal length and maximum aperture are specified using the Non CPU lens data option in the setup menu choosing auto aperture AA when a non CPU lens is attached automatically selects non TTL auto A 277 EE Other Flash Units The following flash units can be used in non TTL auto and manual modes If they are set to TTL
259. on to Use Dial MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Yes allows adjustments that are normally made by holding the amp ISO QUAL WB AF mode amp 3 or BKT button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the command dial after the button is released this also applies to the Fn and depth of field preview buttons if they have been assigned Active D Lighting using Custom Setting f3 Assign Fn button or Custom Setting f4 Assign preview button Setting ends when any of the affected buttons is pressed again or the shutter release button is pressed halfway Except when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay setting will also end when the exposure meters turn off f8 Slot Empty Release Lock MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when no memory card is inserted although no pictures will be recorded they will however be displayed in the monitor in demo mode If Release locked is selected the shutter release button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera f9 Reverse Indicators MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of hetisimiinises 07 the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select i iianinijeh 70 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right
260. ong static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor damage data stored on the memory card or affect the product s internal circuitry Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light source for an extended period Intense light may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect in photographs Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source Do not unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or while images are being recorded or deleted Forcibly cutting power in these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product memory or internal circuitry To prevent an accidental interruption of power avoid carrying the product from one location to another while the AC adapter is connected Cleaning Keep the lens contacts clean When cleaning the camera body use a blower to gently remove dust and lint then wipe gently with a soft dry cloth After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause LCDs to light up or go dark This does not indicate a malfunction and the display will soon return to normal The lens and mirror are easily damaged Dust and lint should be gently removed with a blower When
261. or before taking the camera on a trip take a test shot to ensure that the camera is functioning normally Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction Life Long Learning As part of Nikon s Life Long Learning commitment to ongoing product support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites e For users in the U S A http www nikonusa com e For users in Europe and Africa http www europe nikon com support e For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East http www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQs and general advice on digital imaging and photography Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in your area See the following URL for contact information http imaging nikon com xvii xviii Introduction Overview Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single lens reflex SLR digital camera To get ca the most from your camera please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read by all who use the product EE Symbols and Conventions To make it easier to find the information you need the following symbols and conventions are used V This icon marks cautions information that should be read before use to prevent damage to the camera This
262. or up photography see page 80 83 84 Image Recording Options Image Quality and Size Together image quality and size determine how much space each photograph occupies on the memory card Larger higher quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require more memory meaning that fewer such images can be stored on the memory card M 320 Image Quality Choose a file format and compression ratio image quality Option _File type Description Raw data from the image sensor are saved directly to the memory card NEF RAW NEF Settings such as white balance and contrast can be adjusted ona computer after shooting Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 4 fine JPEG fine ek quality JPEG normal JPEG Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 8 normal quality JPEG basic oe images at a compression ratio of roughly 1 16 basic NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one fine quality JPEG fine JPEG image NEF RAW NEF Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one normal JPEG normal JPEG quality JPEG image NEF RAW Two images are recorded one NEF RAW image and one basic quality JPEG basic JPEG image Size priority selected for JPEG compression 85 Image quality is set by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the control panel The Shooting Menu
263. ot use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0 C 32 F or above 40 C 104 F failure to observe this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance Capacity may be reduced and charging times may increase at battery temperatures from 0 C 32 F to 15 C 59 F and from 45 C 113 F to 60 C 140 F Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging Failure to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only partially charged Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging again If the CHARGE lamp flickers i e flashes about eight times a second during charging confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery If the problem persists cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon authorized service representative The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the MH 25 only Use the charger with compatible batteries only Unplug when not in use EN EL15 Rechargeable Li ion Batteries The supplied EN EL15 shares information with compatible devices enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels N 35 The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge battery life and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged M 242 23 Insert the Battery 1 Turn
264. page 276 will emit a modeling flash when the depth of field preview button is pressed See page 228 for more information AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Provided that an external exposure meter is used the exposure ratio need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture The Exposure Indicator If a shutter speed other than bulb or time is selected the exposure indicator in the viewfinder shows whether the photograph would be under or over exposed at current settings if Lo or Hi is displayed the indicators show the amount of under or over exposure Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl M 211 the amount of under or over exposure is shown in increments of 3 EV or 1 2 EV the illustrations below show the display in the viewfinder when 1 3 step is selected for Custom Setting b2 If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded the displays will flash 0 a a a qinli Optimal exposure Underexposed by 3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV Reverse Indicators If ahii FO is selected for Custom Setting f9 Reverse indicators A 234 the exposure indicators in the viewfinder and information display are displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right Select ehinihitinish 0 to display negative values on the left and positive values on the right EE Long Time Exposures M Mode Only Select the following
265. pensation filters E g e 4000 K 3000 K a difference of 1000 K 83 mired e 7000 K 6000 K a difference of 1000 K 24 mired 121 Choosing a Color Temperature When I Choose color temp is selected for white balance color temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The color temperature is displayed in the control panel ANIAN WB button Sub command dial we K Control panel Choose Color Temperature Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent lighting Choose 4 Flash or Fluorescent for these sources With other light sources take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate The White Balance Menu Color temperature can also be selected in the white SHOOTING MENU i Poy White balance n AE balance menu Note that the color temperature with the 7 Set Picture Control lt WB button and the sub command dial replaces the value y Manage Picture Control Auto distortion control selected in the white balance menu prm TE Active D Lighting Long exp NR EJ High ISO NR 122 Preset Manual Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources with a strong color cast Two methods are available for setting preset white balance Method Description Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighti
266. phone off turns sound recording off selecting any other option turns recording on and sets the microphone to the selected sensitivity e Destination To record movies to the memory I Movie settings card in Slot 1 select Slot 1 Select Slot 2 to oa record movies to the card in Slot 2 The menu Y shows the time available on each card E o m recording ends automatically when no time fit ii remains e Manual movie settings Choose On to allow manual adjustments to shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when the camera is in mode M Shutter speed can be chosen from values between s 000 s and 1 30 s ISO sensitivity from values between ISO 100 and Hi 2 M 101 Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings gt Auto ISO sensitivity control in the shooting menu QQ 103 Exposure compensation is not available 1 Select Movie settings MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus 7 SHOOTING MENU Highlight Movie settings in the shooting ee AN High ISO NR menu and press gt Z u ISO sensitivity settings 4 Multiple exposure si Movie settings Interval timer shooting EJ Remote control mode 2 Choose movie options E Movie settings Highlight the desired item and press then a highlight an option and press 68 OEA Destination i i Manual movie settings OFF 61 Viewing Movies Movies a
267. photograph has a comment M 238 the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset Choosing a White Balance Preset Press A to highlight the current white balance preset E White balance d O d 4 and press to select another preset 2 Preset manual Y Set Edit comment Select image Copy d 0 fr 127 EE Selecting a White Balance Preset To set white balance to a preset value 1 Select PRE Preset manual a Whitebalance i 5 Incandescen Highlight Preset manual in the white op Fluorescent 3 Direct sunlight balance menu and press gt gt as hah Cloudy f amp Shade KI Choose color temp 2i PRE Preset manual gt 2 Selecta preset Highlight the desired preset and press Qi S ss White balance To select the highlighted preset and display p fine tuning menu M 119 without completing the next step press instead d 1 PRE Select K Set 3 Select Set cs White balance Highlight Set and press Fine tuning C menu for the selected white balance preset gt is displayed A 119 B suet imase S Copy d0 Selecting a White Balance Preset the WB Button At a setting of PRE Preset manual presets can also be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub command dial The current preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed WB button Sub command dial Control panel 128 EE Entering a Comment Follow the steps below t
268. photograph was taken using AF C or with continuous servo autofocus selected during AF A focus point is only displayed if option other than auto area AF was selected for AF area mode and camera was able to focus 165 166 EE Highlights K Protect StATUS ccssecssccrsssesersssesssesssseseersssossessasesser 174 7 Retouch indicator wissssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessssssssseeens 248 E Image highlights 2 Folder number frame number uu 218 Current channel 2 6 Highlight display indicator 1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode M 197 2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for the current channel Hold 9 button amp 3 button and press lt or P to cycle through channels as follows RGB pj R G all channels red green BE RGB Histogram 7 1 a 8 2 9 Highlights 3 al m fr 10 5 HAUTO 0 0 6 1tik ei SSelect R G B wl Image highlights E Folder number frame NUMDE se 218 E Protect status crcccnseracussncesaiaistonveiencenseente 174 B blue Retouch indicator csesecssssessscssecscssseccesssecesssseeseees 248 White balance sesseesssessesssessesseessessesseesserseessesseesee 117 Color temperatur e s ssssesssesssesseessscessesssessseesss 122 White balance fine tuning ssssessssssserssssse 119 Preset MANUAL s sesessesssesseessessessressessesssessessesseess 123 6l Current channel J Histogram RGB channel In
269. photos to computer M 179 NEF RAW photos not displayed in Capture NX 2 Update to latest version QI 281 303 Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect Image sensor cleaning changes the position of dust on the low pass filter Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before image sensor cleaning is performed 1 240 Computer displays NEF RAW images differently from camera Third party software does not display effects of Picture Controls or Active D Lighting Use ViewNX 2 supplied or optional Nikon software such as Capture NX 2 available separately Miscellaneous Date of recording is not correct Set camera clock Q 27 237 Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available at certain combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted Note that Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5a AC adapter M 242 304 Error Messages This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the viewfinder control panel and monitor Indicator Control View FEE Lens aperture ring is not set to E ring to da aperture OS E battery e Battery exhausted e Recharge or replace
270. play d5 Screen tips 207 208 208 209 209 209 210 210 211 211 211 212 213 213 213 216 216 216 d Shooting display d6 CL mode shooting speed d7 Max continuous release d8 File number sequence d9 Information display d10 LCD illumination d11 Exposure delay mode d12 Flash warning d13 MB D11 battery type d14 Battery order e Bracketing flash e1 Flash sync speed e2 Flash shutter speed e3 Flash cntrl for built in flash e4 Modeling flash e5 Auto bracketing set 217 217 218 219 219 219 219 220 221 222 223 223 228 229 e6 Bracketing order 229 f Controls fl amp switch 229 229 230 232 232 233 234 234 234 235 f2 OK button shooting mode f3 Assign Fn button f4 Assign preview button f5 Assign AE L AF L button f6 Customize command dials f7 Release button to use dial f8 Slot empty release lock f9 Reverse indicators f10 Assign MB D11 button Note Depending on camera settings some items may be grayed out and unavailable For information on the options available in each shooting mode see page 292 R Reset Custom Settings MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Select Yes to restore Custom Settings to their default values A 296 es Reset custom settings Ta aA Cstomseting 207 a Autofocus a1 AF C Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF C is selected fo
271. pproximate number of images that can be stored in the memory buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and control panel while the shutter release button is pressed The illustration at right shows the display when space remains in the buffer for about 28 pictures See Also For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst see Custom Setting d7 Max continuous release Q 217 For information on the number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst see page 320 79 Self Timer and Remote Modes The self timer and optional ML L3 remote control M 281 can be used to reduce camera shake or for self portraits Mount the camera ona tripod Mount the camera on a tripod or place the camera on a stable level surface 2 Select a release mode Press the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to self timer Or remote mode Release mode dial In remote mode the timing of the shutter MENU button release can be selected using the Remote pom control mode option in the shooting menu wo rs SHOOTING MENU Active D Lighting 7 Long exp NR High ISO NR _ ISO sensitivity settings Multiple exposure OFF Ly Movie settings Interval timer shooting OFF 21 Remote control mode G 2s After pressing the MENU button to display the menus highlight Remote control m
272. press gt f E Load save 2 3 Select a Picture Control GS Manase Picture Control Highlight an existing Picture Control and O press or press 8 to proceed to step 5 to 5 save a copy of the highlighted Picture ae Control without further modification EA TETT 4 Edit the selected Picture Control See page 134 for more information To Sharpening abandon any changes and start over from ai pe 0 ightne default settings press the 1 button Press E f Saturation ue when settings are complete EEA E cate 5 Select a destination E Manage Picture Control Highlight a destination for the custom Bet int Picture Control C 1 through C 9 and N p Pcs a press gt By Acs nises ECS Unused ECT Unused 136 6 Name the Picture Control The text entry dialog shown at right will be Keyboard displayed By default new Picture Controls area are named by adding a two digit number Namea assigned automatically to the name of the uso Wit OK existing Picture Control To move the cursor in the name area hold the 8 amp 2 button and press lt or gt To enter a new letter at the current cursor position use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and press To delete the character at the current cursor position press the 1 button To return to the shooting menu without saving the Picture Control press the MENU button Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characte
273. ps of 3 or 1 2 EV Can also be set to approx 0 3 0 5 Recommended 0 7 1 or 2 EV ISO 25600 equivalent above ISO 6400 auto ISO sensitivity Exposure Index control available Active D Lighting Auto Extra high High Normal Low Off Focus Autofocus Nikon Multi CAM 4800DX autofocus sensor module with TTL phase detection fine tuning 39 focus points including 9 cross type sensors and AF assist illuminator range approx 0 5 3 m 1 ft 8 in 9 ft 10 in Detection range 1 19 EV ISO 100 20 C 68 F Lens servo e Autofocus AF Single servo AF AF S continuous servo AF AF C auto AF S AF C selection AF A predictive focus tracking activated automatically according to subject status e Manual focus M Electronic rangefinder can be used Focus point Can be selected from 39 or 11 focus points AF area mode Single point AF 9 21 or 39 point dynamic area AF 3D tracking auto area AF Focus lock Focus can be locked by pressing shutter release button halfway single servo AF or by pressing AE L AF L button 311 Flash Built in flash Guide Number Flash control Flash mode Flash compensation Flash ready indicator Accessory shoe Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS Sync terminal White balance White balance 312 AUTO 7 1 O 4 2 Y Fa X 9 Auto flash with auto pop up P S A M t1 Manual pop up with button release Approx 12 39 12 39 with manual flash m ft ISO 100 20
274. r Focus point When the focus operation is complete the in focus indicator will appear in the viewfinder In focus indicator Description Subject in focus gt Focus point is between camera and subject lt 4 Focus point is behind subject gt lt Camera unable to focus using autofocus In focus Buffer blinks See page 93 indicator capacity While the shutter release button is pressed halfway the number of exposures that can be stored in the memory buffer Q 79 will be displayed in the viewfinder Step 5 Shoot Smoothly press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to release the shutter and record the photograph The access lamp next to the memory card slot cover will light while the photograph is being recorded to the memory card Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the Access lamp lamp has gone out and recording is complete The Shutter Release Button The camera has a two stage shutter release button The camera focuses when the shutter release button is pressed halfway To take the photograph press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Focus press halfway Shoot press all the way down Auto Meter Off The viewfinder and the control panel shutter speed and aperture displays will turn off if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds auto meter off reducing the drain on the battery Press the shutter relea
275. r Slot 1 ssesssssseesen 30 89 Memory card indicator Slot 2 sssssescessseee 30 89 ISO Sensitivity indicator sssssssssssseesssssoessssee 101 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator csessesseeseeeeees 104 K appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures cccsscsssscecssssssscsssscsssssecesseeseens 36 BE Clock not set indicator sesssssesnseenseens 28 237 Interval timer iNdiCatOK cseessssesssssseesssseesssseees 157 25 Multiple exposure indicator ceseseeseseeseeees 153 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 109 WB bracketing iNdicatOr csecccsessesseeeseseeees 112 ADL bracketing indicator csesesessecseeseeeeees 114 Bracketing progress indicator 109 112 115 28 GPS connection indicator ssssesssseeesssssessssecees 162 7 oe Metering sscsscissscatasicteseeasntanitnasnincsaaianunn 105 Number of exposures remaining eseesecseeees 36 Number of shots remaining before memory ITN TIS e E E EET 38 79 Capture mode indicator eseeeseeseeeeseeseeeesees 181 SO Sensitivity sasainn 101 Preset white balance recording indicator 124 Active D Lighting amount sss ssssseeesssssessssssees 139 Manual lens NUMbET c esessssssessessssecseeseesees 161 HDMI CEC connection indicator sceesesees 194 Ine Viewfinder 2 Ooo OQO00090000000 ooo0oo0og0000000 ooo0o00000000 OO
276. r lenses faster 2 Spot metering meters selected focus point 7 When AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 105 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 New or AF 28 85mm 3 Can not be used with shifting or tilting f 3 5 4 5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the 4 The camera s exposure metering and flash minimum focus distance the in focus indicator control systems may not function as expected may be displayed when the image on the matte when the lens is shifted and or tilted or aperture screen in the viewfinder is not in focus Focus is set to a value other than maximum manually until image in viewfinder is in focus 5 AF S or AF I lens required 8 With maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster 269 BE Compatible Non CPU Lenses When using the following non CPU lenses and accessories rotate the camera mode dial to Aand M and set aperture using the lens aperture ring In other modes the shutter release is disabled Non CPU lens data M 159 can be used to enable many of the features available with CPU lenses including color matrix metering if no data are provided center weighted metering will be used in place of color matrix metering while if the maximum aperture is not provided the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring For a list of non CPU lenses and accessories that can not be used with this camera see page 271 Camera setting Focus
277. r Up ecccceseeee 7 77 83 O AUTO MOE csecseecsseeseeeee 35 36 Auto flash off mode 35 36 SCENE SCONA ssscescossecscesseseseceees 40 Portrait sseseessessessseessseseesseeeesse 41 Landscape sse sssssessssessseeeessee 41 E Child access caesarean 41 SASOS ainan 41 Y Close Up sssssssseesesssssseerorssssssseeree 42 Pi Night Portrait 0 0 cesses 42 Night Landscape secsee 42 MM Party INGOOTS ssecsecseececeeeees 42 28 Beach SNOW c sssssssessseeseeseeees 43 E SUNSEt esesssssesevessssscesssesecessssseeeee 43 i Dusk Dawn esssseesesssseerssssseeee 43 9 Pet Portrait cesses 43 Candlelight cesseessecseeseesseeees 44 B BIOSSOM sssenesssseeesosssssersssseersesssee 44 Autumn Colors sesesssssseessseseces 44 M FOA iiics 44 A SHNOUCTHE 0 ee esseseeseeseseenees 45 mi High Key cstsssvssssecesiasassessnsnosassoess 45 Low Key sesssssessssssssersssssseressse 45 P Programmed auto cccce 68 S Shutter priority auto 69 A Aperture priority auto 70 M Manual esesessessesecsssesseeseseees 71 UO iinientiricdieniiecaiaincionn 75 IS Face priority AF uss 50 fin Wide aread AF sesessesseeseeee 50 ba Normal area AF c cseceeceeseeee 50 46 Subject tracking AF 50 ED Matrix cscescececsesessessesecseseesees 105 e Center weighted 105 213 U
278. r and press lt or P to 3 Done choose a lens number between 1 and 9 CSa9 Y Lens number E gt Focal length mm Maximum aperture Move Set 159 160 3 Enter the focal length and aperture E Nom CPU lens data Highlight Focal length mm or Maximum gt aperture and press lt or P to edit the lt gt L TET highlighted item Focal length can be r selected from values between 6 and l 6S BOOM 4 000 mm maximum aperture from values between f 1 2 and f 22 Focal Length Not Listed If the correct focal length is not listed choose the closest value greater than the actual focal length of the lens Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and the lens Note that lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out The data for different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers or the data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted 4 Select Done E NonrCPU lens data Highlight Done and press 6 The specified focal length and aperture will be stored L apres BE under the chosen lens number cca aor Move Set To recall lens data when using a non CPU lens 1 Assign non CPU lens number selection to a camera control Select Choose non CPU lens number for Custom Setting f3 Assign Fn button M 230 or C
279. r viewfinder photography 1 91 this option controls whether photographs can be taken whenever the shutter release button is m pressed release priority or only when the camera is in focus focus priority a AF mode Main command dial button Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected focus will not lock when AF C is selected for AF mode The camera will continue to adjust focus until the shutter is released a2 AF S Priority Selection MENU button gt Custom Settings menu When AF S is selected for viewfinder photography 1 91 this option controls whether photographs can be taken only when the camera is in focus focus priority or whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority AF mode Main command dial button Option Description Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed Es Focus Photos can only be taken when the in focus indicator is displayed Regardless of the option selected if the in focus indicator is displayed when AF S is selected for AF mode focus will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus lock continues until the shutter is released 208 a3 Focus Tracking with Lock On MENU button gt Custom Settings
280. r warning display ON B Resetcustom 45 Screen tips d6CL mode shooting speed se tti n gs d7 Max continuous release d8 File number sequence Q 207 Main menu Bracketing flash leiFlash sync speed at Flash shutter speed 1 60 Flash cntrl for built in flash TTL Modeling flash ON Auto bracketing set AES Bracketing order IN 1 switch 5 2 OK button shooting mode RESET _ f Controls 1 switch i f2 OK button shooting mode RESET 3 Assign Fn button 4Assign preview button 5 Assign AE L AF L button a 6 Customize command dials a 7 Release button to use dial OFF 8 Slot empty release lock OK The following Custom Settings are available Custom Setting A Reset custom settings a Autofocus al AF C priority selection a2 AF S priority selection a3 Focus tracking with lock on a4 AF point illumination a5 Focus point wrap around a6 Number of focus points a7 Built in AF assist illuminator a8 Live view movie AF b Metering exposure b1 ISO sensitivity step value b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl b3 Easy exposure compensation b4 Center weighted area b5 Fine tune optimal exposure c Timers AE lock c1 Shutter release button AE L c2 Auto meter off delay 3 Self timer c4 Monitor off delay c5 Remote on duration d Shooting display d1 Beep d2 Viewfinder grid display d3 ISO display and adjustment d4 Viewfinder warning dis
281. ra will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released Getting Good Results with Autofocus Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus under these conditions or the in focus indicator may be displayed and the camera may sound a beep allowing the shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus In these cases focus manually M 99 or use focus lock C1 97 to focus on another subject at the same distance and then recompose the photograph There is little or no contrast between the subject and the background The focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness Example Subject is the same color as the background Example Subject is half in the shade The focus point contains objects at different distances from the camera Background objects appear larger than the subject Example A building is in the frame behind the subject Example Subject is inside a cage The subject contains many The subject is dominated by Sa to fine details regular geometric patterns af Example A f
282. rce fi 7 Select image s 100 Select destination folder 102 ST Copy image s OK A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press 8 Press again to rae exit when copying is complete Sl V Copying Images Images will not be copied if there is insufficient space on the destination card Be sure the battery is fully charged before copying movies If the destination folder contains an image with the same name as one of the images to be copied a confirmation dialog will be displayed Select Replace O eeni i e e e i A AK existing image to replace the image with the image to taats araut sal eplace all be copied or select Replace all to replace all existing kip ancel images with the same names without further prompting To continue without replacing the image select Skip or select Cancel to exit without copying any further images Protect status is copied with the images but print marking M 189 is not Hidden images can not be copied 199 Image Review MENU button gt 1 playback menu Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the ma Image review monitor immediately after shooting If Off is selected pictures p can only be displayed by pressing the gt button After Delete MENU button gt gt playback menu Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted Option Description Display following picture If deleted picture was last frame previo
283. rding may end unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used SDXC memory cards SanDisk 4 GB 8 GB 16 GB 32 GB 64GB Toshiba Panasonic 1 GB 2 GB 4 GB 6 GB 8 GB 12 GB 16 GB 32 GB 48 GB 64 GB Lexar Media f 4 GB 8 GB Platinum I Professional 1 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB cards 2 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be usedare S2 S SDHC compliant The camera supports UHS I Glis GI 3 Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDXC compliant The camera supports UHS a D i Other cards have not been tested For more details on the above cards please contact the manufacturer I 319 Memory Card Capacity The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on a 8 GB SanDisk Extreme SDHC card at different image quality and size settings image quality per opacity NEF RAW Lossless NEF RAW Lossless eer i compressed 14 bit NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit 13 6MB 15 NEF RAW Compressed 14 bit 167MB 12 3 JPEG fine 4 4 MB 100 100 39MB 100 JPEG normal 100 100 100 JPEG basic 100 100 1 All figures are approximate File size varies with scene recorded 2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100 Drops if Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression or long exposure noise reduc
284. re for printing hold the 9 button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon and the number of prints will be set to 1 Keeping the 9 button pressed press A or F to specify the number of prints upto amp button View photo full screen 99 to deselect the picture press V whenthe pF O A Print select number of prints is 1 Continue until all the z desired pictures have been selected mM Selecting Photographs for Printing a IPE op 77 NEF RAW photographs M 85 can not be selected for printing JPEG copies of NEF RAW images can be created using the NEF RAW processing option in the retouch menu CO 258 If you chose Select date in Step 2 press A or V p Select date to highlight a date and press to toggle the TOTI highlighted date on or off To view the 18 04 2010 pictures taken on the selected date press Qa Use the multi selector to scroll through the Ena A and pa Q to view the aE button View parm current picture full screen Press 9 again to photos forselected A Confirm ey wey pe Back Zoom Ok Set button View A highlighted photo PE full screen 186 4 Display printing options m Setup Press 6 to display PictBridge printing Start printing options Page size Border Time stamp 5 Adjust printing options Press A or W to highlight an option and press gt to select Option Page size Border Time stamp 6 Start pri
285. re indicated by a icon in full frame playback M 163 Press to start playback MB icon Length Current position total length 1 100D7000 DSC_0013 MOV 24fps 15 04 2010 12 50 00 1920x1080 Volume Guide i The following operations can be performed To Description Pause Pause playback Pla Resume playback when movie is paused or during rewind y advance Speed doubles with each press from 2x to 4x to 8x to 16x keep pressed to skip nE Advance ae i renina to beginning or end of movie If playback is paused movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time keep pressed for continuous rewind or advance Adjust volume Q qm Press amp to increase volume 8 amp 4 to decrease Edit movie To edit movie press on while movie is paused 1 63 Return to full Press A or gt to exit to full frame playback frame playback Exit to shooting v Press shutter release button halfway Monitor will turn off mode CG _ photographs can be taken immediately Display menus MENU See page 195 for more information The N Icon Xl is displayed in full frame and movie playback if the movie was recorded without sound 1 10007000 24f ps 15 04 2010 41920x1080 62 Editing Movies Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected frames as JPEG stills Option Description Choose start point Create a copy from which the opening footage has been removed Choose end poi
286. reiar inaen a eena aKO 208 a2 AF S Priority Selection sseessiisssseessscosesssuseossssooseroasesnreossrosneorsnssosessooeeossooareriineressssss 208 a3 Focus Tracking With Lock On ssessssessssesssesssseesseesseessseeosseesseesssesneeosserosseesseesss 209 a4 AF Point Illumination ssssessesesssssesssseesssseesssseessseeesseeessseesosserouseeessserosseeossserossseessse 209 a5 Focus Point Wrap Around e sesesssesseesseesseessessseoserosessseoseconecssecsssroseeoseesseoseeoseessee 209 a6 Number of Focus Points s esesssssesssssesesssseesssssceesssseeessssseesssseeeesseseeosssseresssseeesssseee 210 a7 Built in AF assist Illuminator sseessessssessseesssessseessseesseesneeonseeosseesseeoeeosseenseeonseessse 210 AB Live View Movie AF ssssssesssssssesssesssesssesssesserosesosessseosseossesseesseesscossrossroseeeseosseossesse 211 DEIVIGECTING EX OSUN Guaina ae e see Pau tat acettic nner eadn ate 211 b1 ISO Sensitivity Step ValUe uu nen n N e 211 D2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntr anann a a 211 b3 Easy Exposure Compensation c cecsssssessssecsssssscsssesscsssecsssecscsescsssecscsessesessces 212 b4 Center Weighted Area csssssssssessssssscsssecssssssssssscsssssscsssessssecsssesecsssecsssesscseseces 213 DS Fine Tune Optimal EXPOSUTE messiinnnarnsronnania a R 213 C LIMES AE LOCK erann A aec teasers tna tear ore mate ae 213 C1 Shutter Release Button AE L ou csessssssessssesscsssecsssecscsesecs
287. release button is held down in single frame release mode photographs will be taken at about 6 fps Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to choose Active D Lighting M 139 If image quality is set to JPEG fine JPEG normal or JPEG basic RAW will be displayed in the control panel and an NEF RAW copy will be recorded with the next picture taken after the Fn button is pressed to record NEF RAW copies with a series of photographs keep the shutter release button pressed halfway between shots To exit without recording an NEF RAW copy press the Fn button again Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Center weighted metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Option a Spot metering Framing grid Viewfinder I virtual horizon Access top item in MY MENU HO 1 step spd aperture Choose non Non GPU CPU lens number gt Playback eREC Start movie recording Description Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is pressed Press the Fn button and rotate the main command dial to turn the framing grid display in the viewfinder on or off 9 Press the Fn button to view or hide a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder M 231 Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in MY MENU Select this option for quick access to a frequently used menu item If the Fn button is pressed when the command dials are rotated changes to shutter speed modes S
288. ressing A during full frame or thumbnail playback The dialog shown at right will be displayed highlight the desired slot and press to list the folders on the selected card then highlight a folder and press to view the pictures in the highlighted folder The same procedure can be used when selecting pictures for operations in the playback BKT button M 195 and retouch M 248 menus or when copying white Pa gt re balance from an existing photograph 1 127 Cancel See Also For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations are performed see Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay 215 Photo Information Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full frame playback Press A or W to cycle through photo information as shown below Note that shooting data RGB histograms and highlights are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display mode gt Detailed photo info 197 shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright information was recorded with the photographs as described on page 243 GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used when the photo was taken 1 12 NIKON D7000 D a D a gt Z J a amp LATITUDE N oy 4 oy T EHE 371 LONGITUDE lt 2A AXED 139 43 696 d ALTITUDE 35m P 1 125 F5 6 100 35mm TIME UTC 15 04 2010 P 10 02 27 Ry SEV S A S A j A D RAN A fi 100D7000 DSC
289. reveal selected pictures py Select date Selecting this option displays a list of dates To hide all pictures taken on a date highlight the date and press gt Eman Selectdate Selected dates are marked by av to reveal all pictures i tefou2010 taken on a selected date highlight it and press Press E to complete the operation Confirm Deselect all Reveal all pictures Protected and Hidden Images Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image Follow the steps below to hide or reveal selected pictures 1 Choose Select set ma Hide image Highlight Select set and press P A 85a Select set gt CA Select date fe ALL Deselect all 2 Select pictures Use the multi selector to scroll through the ITA wa Hide image Y P Select set DA pictures on the memory card to view the z highlighted picture full screen press and A Fee hold the amp button to view images in other lt gt locations as described on page 164 hold Lis BKT and press A and press 9S to select the current picture Selected pictures are marked by a icon to deselect a picture highlight it and press 9 again Continue until all the desired pictures have been selected CHN COV AY mn O1 010 4 3 Press 6R Press K to complete the operation 196 Display Mode MENU button gt playback menu Choose the information available in the playback photo ma Display mode informatio
290. ring in the information display see Custom Setting d9 Information display N 219 11 12 EE Changing Settings in the Information Display To change settings for the items listed below press the Hf button in the information display Highlight items using the multi selector and press to view options for the highlighted item Tool Tips E Movie QUAN sccactstssecstncristerrrcartearnerinionati 60 BR High ISO noise reduction sssussessesssesssesnse 205 BE Active D Lighting isien 139 Color SPACE assiosuisesesniisrorsnssviesroisi niesie 141 Depth of field preview button assignment 232 BJ Fn button assignment ssssessseessesssenssen 230 AE L AF L button assignment ccsssssessssseessssees 232 8 Piore Conifol enorer 132 9 Long exposure noise FECUCTION ccseeseeeeeees 205 KJ Auto distortion control ssssssesssesseenssesnseen 205 A tool tip giving the name of the selected item appears in the information display Tool tips can be turned off using Custom Setting d5 Screen Tips M 216 The Command Dials The main and sub command dials are used alone or in combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings 45 EA button Flash mode Flash compensation BKT button Bracketing a1 LJ EnEn naar AF mode button Autofocus mode AF area mode UUUUUUUUUUUUVUUUUUU uuu aittitta iini niitti im C emmanddat Exposure compensation
291. rity selection 0 208 PF F a E 50 AF S iaumanueanmddeinn 50 91 208 AF S priority selection 208 After delete ccessssssssesseessseeees 200 A M SWITCH 4 dnsmntescinanimianiannd 25 AMIDE I himidwnuwinimaae 119 255 Aperture 1 cecesececscececeees 67 70 71 Aperture priority auto 70 Aspect ratio ccnccmeununiniwndn 252 Assign AE L AF L button 232 Assign Fn button sessesssseesssssessssee 230 Assign MB D11 button 235 Assign preview button 232 Attaching the lenS ese sssseessseess 25 Audio video A V cable 191 Auto White balance 06 117 Auto bracketing 109 229 Auto bracketing Set 229 Auto distortion control 205 Auto flaSh ou ecessesssssesssesecseeseescees 145 Auto FP high speed sync 222 223 Auto image rotatiOn eee 239 Auto ISO sensitivity control 103 Auto meter off 0 39 214 Auto meter off delay 214 Auto area AF ssssseesssesseessesssessesssees 95 AUtOFOCUS ecessessesseeeeseees 50 91 98 Autofocus mode Live view movie PE tecceeatnmianmeneincann 50 211 Auto servo AF sicscscntcscccnssccinesserceassens 91 Available Setting 292 B Backlight ssssessssesssssessssserssserssseees 219 Backup Role played by card in o 2 EE 89 Battery s00 21 24 35 242 315 Battery info essseesssssesessssseesssssseeesss 242 Battery
292. rmation on making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the E4 button see Custom Setting b3 Easy exposure compensation M 212 For information on automatically varying exposure flash level white balance or Active D Lighting see page 109 B rac ket i n g P S A and M Modes Only Bracketing automatically varies exposure flash level Active D Lighting ADL or white balance slightly with each shot bracketing the current value Choose in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure flash level white balance or Active D Lighting and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot or to experiment with different settings for the same subject EE Exposure and Flash Bracketing To vary exposure and or flash level over a series of photographs 1 Select exposure or flash bracketing MENU button To display the menus press the MENU button 2 Bracketina flash Select Custom Setting e5 Auto bracketing eee ve set in the Custom Settings menu highlight maom eE ON an option and press Choose AE amp flash Sa to vary both exposure and flash level AE k l only to vary only exposure or Flash only to Bi 5 Auto bracketing set vary only flash level A To AE AEonly ca Flash only j WB WB bracketing E ADL bracketing 2 Choose the number of shots Pressing the BKT button rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence and
293. rned on and off by Fanner highlighting it and pressing gt ea 2 m Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring the camera to another person Nikon does not accept liability for any damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright information option 243 Save Load Settings MENU button gt Y Setup menu Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory card in Slot 1 if the memory card is full an error will be displayed 1 306 Menu Custom settings Menu Option Display mode Image review After delete Rotate tall File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 Image quality Image size JPEG compression NEF RAW recording White balance with fine tuning and presets d 0 d 4 Set Picture Control Auto distortion control Color space Active D Lighting Long exp NR High ISO NR ISO sensitivity settings Movie settings Remote control mode Playback Setup Shooting Recent Option All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings Clean image sensor Video mode HDMI Flicker reduction Time zone and date excepting date and time Language Image comment Auto image rotation Copyright information GPS Non CPU lens data My Menu All My Menu items All recent settings Settings Choose tab
294. rol mode ss esssserssseressseersss 80 R Rank items My Menu 06 267 RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 Role played by card in Slot 2 89 Rear IONS CAP csesessssssessssssecseseseees 25 Rear curtain SYNC uu eseseesseceeeees 145 Recent settings c cscscsssssrssceceees 268 Red intensifier Filter effects 254 Red eye correction s sssessssersssere 251 Red eye reduction s sssessseeesse11 145 Release button to use dial 234 Release mode cessecsssecsseesseees 7 77 Release mode dial s s0001000 7 77 Release mode dial lock release 7 77 Remote Control 7 77 80 281 Remote control mode c s0 80 Remote cord cccssecseees 73 83 281 Remote mirror up Remote control mode ss esssserssseressseersss 80 Remove items My Menu 266 Repeating flash 76 151 224 OS OU iinit 151 202 207 Reset custom settings 004 207 Reset shooting mMenu 06 202 Reset user SQttiNgS scssscscsseees 76 RES ZE nce eicheaiedteamaue kes 259 Restoring default settinggs 151 202 207 295 Retouch MANU sesecseesssesseeeesees 248 Reverse INdICAtOIS cseseseesees 234 RGB sisusuusnnenimmanamumrauns 141 Role played by card in Slot 2 89 Rotate Tall ws sitseiniennainaieauiarans 200 S Save selected frame 63 66 Save load settings ccseseccecseees 244 Saving camera settings
295. rs long Any characters after the nineteenth will be deleted 7 Save changes and exit After editing the name press amp to save GH Set Picture Control changes and exit The new Picture Control SEN Neutral r 7 EWI Vivid will appear in the Picture Control list 7 auc Monochrome SA PT Portrait isis Landscape Grid Adjust Manage Picture Control gt Rename Custom Picture Controls can be renamed at any time fs Manage Picture Control using the Rename option in the Manage Picture a Control menu x Save edit Delete Manage Picture Control gt Delete r The Delete option in the Manage Picture Control menu can be used to delete selected custom Picture Controls when they are no longer needed The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display Original Picture Control icon OB Sharpening Y Contrast E Brightness Saturation Hue Grid ONOK Reset 137 Sharing Custom Picture Controls Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility available with ViewNxX 2 or optional software such as Capture NX 2 can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera or custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software and then deleted when no longer needed To copy custom
296. rty Indoor Capture the effects of indoor background lighting Use for parties and other indoor scenes 28 Beach Snow Capture the brightness of sunlight expanses of water snow or sand The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off Sunset ms Dusk Dawn Preserves the colors seen in the weak natural light before dawn or after sunset The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor va Pet Portrait Preserves the deep hues seen in sunsets and sunrises The built in flash and AF assist illuminator turn off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Use for portraits of active pets The AF assist illuminator turns off 43 44 Candlelight Dra O For photographs taken by candlelight The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor es yy Blossom gt Wor aes i D Fae ly Use for fields of flowers orchards in bloom and other landscapes featuring expanses of blossoms The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor Captures the brilliant reds and yellows in autumn leaves The built in flash turns off use of a tripod is recommended to prevent blur when lighting is poor t1 Food ail Use for vivid photographs of food Use of a tripod is
297. s The built in flash can also be used with Al S Al Al modified NIKKOR Nikon Series E and non CPU lenses with a focal length of 16 300mm Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 modified Al 50 300mm f 4 5 and Al S 50 300 mm f 4 5 ED lenses must be used at a zoom position of 135mm or above and Al 50 300 mm f 4 5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 105mm or above The AF S AF I Teleconverter The AF S AF I teleconverter can be used with the following AF S and AF I lenses AF S VR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8G ED VR II AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D ED AF S VR Micro 105mm f 2 8G ED AF S VR 200mm f 2G ED AF S VR 200 400mm f 4G ED 2 AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G ED VR II 2 AF S VR 300mm f 2 8G ED AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED AF S 300mm f 2 8D ED II AF 300mm f 2 8D ED AF S 300mm f 4D ED 2 1 Autofocus not supported AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S 400mm f 2 8D ED II AF 400mm f 2 8D ED AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR 2 AF S 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S 500mm f 4D ED II AF I 500mm f 4D ED 2 AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR 2 AF S 600mm f 4D ED 2 AF S 600mm f 4D ED II AF I 600mm f 4D ED 2 2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF S Teleconverter TC 17E II TC 20E II TC 20E Ill M AF Assist Illumination AF assist illumination is available with lenses with focal lengths of 24 200 mm It can not however be used to assist the focus operation with the following lenses e AF S NIKKOR 14 24mm f 2 8G ED e AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 70
298. s By specifying lens data lens focal length and maximum aperture the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non CPU lens M 270 Ifthe focal length of the lens is known e Power zoom can be used with SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 and SB 600 flash units available separately e Lens focal length is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display If the maximum aperture of the lens is known e The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder e Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture e Aperture is listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens e Enables color matrix metering note that it may be necessary to use center weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses including Reflex NIKKOR lenses e Improves the precision of center weighted and spot metering and i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR The camera can store data for up to nine non CPU lenses To enter or edit data fora non CPU lens 1 Select Non CPU lens data MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus f 2 p SETUP MENU Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup p Copyright information menu and press gt settings Virtual horizon Lil Non CPU lens data No 1 AF fine tune El Firmware version 2 Choose a lens number E Non CPU lens data Highlight Lens numbe
299. s Set the lens focus mode switch to M AF S Lenses Users of AF S lenses including the AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens used in this manual for illustrative purposes M 315 316 can select manual focus simply by setting the lens focus mode switch to M e AF lenses Set the lens focus mode switch if present Focus mode selector and camera focus mode selector to M m AF Lenses Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus mode switch set to M and the camera focus mode selector set to AF Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera e Manual focus lenses Set the camera focus mode selector to M To focus manually adjust the lens focus ring until the image displayed on the clear matte field in the viewfinder is in focus Photographs can be taken at any time even when the image is not in focus 99 100 EE The Electronic Rangefinder If the lens has a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster the viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm whether the subject in the selected focus point is in focus the focus point can be selected from any of the 39 focus points After positioning the subject in the selected focus point press the shutter release button halfway and rotate the lens focus ring until the in focus indicator is displayed Note that with the subjects listed on page 93 the in focus indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus confirm
300. s EP 5B power connector available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions W x H x D Approx 132 x 105 x 77 mm 5 2 x 4 1 x 3 in Weight Approx 690 g 1 Ib 8 3 0z camera body only approx 780 g 1 Ib 11 5 oz with battery and memory card but without body cap Operating environment Temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Humidity Less than 85 no condensation e Unless otherwise stated all figures are for a camera with a fully charged battery operating at an ambient temperature of 20 C 68 F e Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain MH 25 battery charger Rated input in North America des algae ae a AC 100 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 23 0 12 A in other regions Rated output DC 8 4 V 1 2 A Supported batteries Nikon rechargeable Li ion battery EN EL15 Charging time Approx 2 hours 35 minutes at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F when no charge remains Operating temperature 0 40 C 32 104 F Dimensions W x H x D Approx 82 5 x 28 x 65 mm 3 2 x 1 1 x 2 6 in excluding projections Length of power cable Approx 1 8 m 6 ft Weight Approx 110 g 3 9 oz excluding power cable and AC wall adapter EN EL15 rechargeable Li ion battery Type Rechargeable l
301. s described on page 119 Six settings in both directions are WR buton Sub tommanddial available each increment is equivalent to about 5 mired M 121 Press the WB button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel Rotating the sub command dial to the left increases the amount of amber A Rotating the sub command dial to the right increases the amount of blue B An asterisk appears in the control panel at settings other than 0 MEA Control panel White Balance Fine Tuning The colors on the fine tuning axes are relative not absolute For example moving the cursor to B blue when a warm setting such as incandescent is selected for white balance will make photographs slightly colder but will not actually make them blue Color Temperature Fine Tuning E White balance When Choose color temp is selected you can view the Dee color temperature while fine tuning white balance Adjust OKOK Mired Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106 is a measure of color temperature that takes such variation into account and as such is the unit used in color temperature com
302. s in the monitor 167 168 BE Shooting Data Page 1 ED Shooting MOde sssessssesssseesssecssseeossecossseossseossseossseos 6 k ISO sensitivity s ssssseesseeeesssosssssssssssssssnsssssnsssssee 101 3 9 pr FA 8 K Exposure COMPENSATION cecsseceseseseeeseeseeeeees 107 g E J3 a Optimal exposure tuning ssssesssssssssseseceesss 213 e soll 6 Focal length ccessssssesssssssssssssssssssssssesssssssseess 159 274 H i Lens data ba E i FOCUS MOQe sssssssssssssssrssssssssssessssseesressssseenresssssee 91 99 Lens VR vibration reduction 4 0 26 Flash UY PEssssrirseireriniiesanenrns 143 275 B Commander Mode se ssesssessessesssesssessesseessesseessesss 225 Flash OGG nai ctee eee 144 Flash COMIUY Ola cecuiscccsscteatdovesaseasicheisstaliciadieideosevendeanae 223 ia Flash COMPENSATION ccesesseseseesssesscscsesseseseeeees 148 Metering s ssesssesseessesseoseessesseosseoseessesseoserosessrosseoseesse 105 12 Camera name Aperture BB folder number frame number nnn ats 1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode M 197 2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on 3 Displayed if Custom Setting b5 Fine tune optimal exposure M 213 has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached EE Shooting Data Page 2 CONGES ACC sesscccscncercctstscscetsccentaztscslaehsasslasbcnsbestnesss 141 p Picture CO
303. s not indicate a malfunction The Information Display Press the M button to display shutter speed aperture the number of exposures remaining AF area mode and other shooting information in the monitor 12 3 4 56 7 Exposure indicator s ssssssssssssesssssssrresreessrssrressrsssees 72 k Exposure compensation display scssessee 107 Ct aF Bracketing progress indicator 21 Exposure and flash bracketing sssessssee 109 i E WB bracketing cescsscsesssessesseessessesseesesseeseesees 112 gers enian 5 Iso sO RN 10 Auto area AF indicator E E PEN 95 on z eek 11 FOCUS points IMGI CATON sssssnsvccsssvsssesssansseresensesven 37 96 se TE AUTO LO 128 108 AF area mode indicator eeessssssssssssssssseeessesessseee 95 ES T i 12 3D tracking indicator sssssssssssesssssssrsssresrressrese 94 2 a ISO sensitivity iNdiCator ss sssssesssssrrsssrrssssrresssn 101 17 16 15 14 13 Auto ISO sensitivity iNdicator cccsecsesseeeeees 104 1 Shooting MOde sssssssssssssssssesssseseseeseseeeeeeeeeeeerereseeseses 6 H K appears when memory remains for over 2 Flexible program indicator ssmsnmomenensneneuee 68 1000 exposures u s Peene aet 36 BE Flash sync indicators 222 k Number of exposures remaining N ZB Shutter speed ss ssssssssssssseeesssessssssseessssseesssssee 69 71 Mangakiens namper eee ee a EXOSCUie lt OuIDENS ALON Walliecdn eevee 10
304. s on the memory card FEKA RA as shown at right ki lt a fie OK Print 2 Display printing options y Setu Press to display PictBridge printing options a Page size Border Time stamp 3 Adjust printing options Choose page size border and time stamp options as described on page 187 a warning will be displayed if the selected page size is too small 4 Start printing Select Start printing and press to start printing To cancel before printing is complete press 188 Creating a DPOF Print Order Print Set The Print set DPOF option in the playback menu is used to create digital print orders for PictBridge compatible printers and devices that support DPOF 1 Choose Select set for the Print set MENU button DPOF item in the playback menu E ma Print set DPOF Press the MENU button and select Print set j DPOF in the playback menu Highlight p Select set and press to remove all E Deselect all photographs from the print order select 3 Deselect all 2 Select pictures p Print OP Use the multi selector to scroll through the y pictures on the memory card to view FE Kom Ba images in other locations hold the BKT i g 100 4 qa a button and press A To display the current eset Zon OK picture in full screen press and hold the amp button To select the current picture for printing hold the 8 button and press A The picture will be marked with a amp icon a
305. s only available if the button is pressed to display the retouch menu when a copy or original is played back full frame 1 Selecta picture In full frame playback select a retouched copy shown by a amp 4 icon or a photograph that has been retouched and press 6 NORWAL 4928x3264 2 Select Side by side comparison Distortion control Highlight Side by side comparison and press ny R Color sketch Al Perspective control Miniature effect m0 Side by side comparison Cancel 3 Compare the copy with the original The source image is displayed on the left the copy retouched copy on the right with the options used to create the copy listed at the top of the display Press lt or gt to switch between the source image and the retouched copy To view nee the highlighted picture full frame press and hold V yy Eaa the amp button If the copy was created from two Sburce Petouched source images using Image overlay or if the image copy source has been copied multiple times press A or W to view the other source images or copies To exit to playback mode press the gt button To exit to playback mode with the highlighted image displayed press m Side by side Comparisons The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that was protected M 174 is on a locked memory card has since been deleted or hidden M 196 or 264 is on a card in a different slot from tha
306. se button halfway to reactivate the display The auto meter off delay can be selected using Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay Q 214 6s LEZ lt 1 Exposure meters on Exposure meters off The Built in Flash If additional lighting is required for correct exposure in mode the built in flash will pop up automatically when the shutter release button is pressed halfway If the flash is raised photographs can only be taken when the flash ready indicator is displayed If the flash ready indicator is not displayed the flash is charging remove your finger briefly from the shutter release button and try again To save battery power when the flash is not in use return it to its closed position by pressing it gently downward till the latch clicks into place 39 40 Creative Photography Scene Modes The camera offers a choice of scene modes Choosing a scene mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected scene making creative photography as simple as selecting a mode framing a picture and shooting as described on pages 35 39 BE SCENE Mode To select a scene rotate the mode dial to SCENE and then rotate the main command dial until the desired scene is displayed in the monitor The monitor turns on automatically when the dial is rotated Mode dial sof SON EAA sk S amp SOF OF PT a amp om Night Night portrait landscape Autumn colors EE Scen
307. ser provides lens data e Center weighted Weight of 75 given to 8 mm circle in center of frame Diameter of circle can be changed to 6 10 or 13 mm or weighting can be based on average of entire frame fixed at 8 mm when non CPU lens is used e Spot Meters 3 5 mm circle about 2 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU lens is used e Matrix or center weighted metering 0 20 EV e Spot metering 2 20 EV Combined CPU and Al Exposure Mode Auto amp auto amp auto flash off scene Z portrait le landscape amp child X sports W close up Pi night portrait E night landscape X party indoor 38 beach snow sunset waa dusk dawn pet portrait candlelight amp blossom autumn colors 4 food silhouette Hii high key Hd low key programmed auto with flexible program P shutter priority auto aperture priority auto A manual M U1 user settings 1 U2 user settings 2 Exposure compensation 5 5 EV in increments of 3 or 1 2 EV Exposure bracketing 2 3 frames in steps of 3 1 2 2 3 1 or 2 EV oo Flash bracketing 2 3 frames in steps of 3 1 2 2 3 1 or 2 EV mnie aaan 2 3 frames in steps of 1 2 or 3 bracketing ADL bracketing 2 frames using selected value for one frame or 3 frames using preset values for all frames Exposure lock Luminosity locked at detected value with AE L AF L button ISO sensitivity ISO 100 6400 in ste
308. service personnel 1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter A reliable power source is required when inspecting or cleaning the low pass filter Turn the camera off and insert a fully charged EN EL15 battery or connect an optional EP 5B power connector and EH 5a AC adapter 2 Remove the lens Turn the camera off and remove the lens 3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning MENU button Turn the camera on and press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Lock T5 mirror up for cleaning in the setup menu and press note that this option is not available at battery levels of lt a or below Lock mirror up for cleaning v Ce 4 Press The message shown at right will be Wan duitlerreleass E TEET r pressed the mirror lifts and displayed in the monitor and a row of dashes shutter opens will appear in the control panel and To aor mion all Ul cit viewfinder To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 286 Raise the mirror lly l 5 Press the shutter release button all the way 1 1 ITA down The mirror will be raised and the shutter curtain will open revealing the low pass filter Examine the low pass filter Holding the camera so that light falls on the low pass filter examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 8 Clean the filter Remove any dus
309. shutter release button all the way down to start shooting 5 Close the shutter Bulb Take your finger off the shutter release button Time Press the ML L3 shutter release button all the way down Shooting ends automatically after thirty minutes 74 User Settings U1 and U2 Modes Assign frequently used settings to the U1 and U2 positions on the mode dial Saving User Settings 1 Select a mode Mode dial Rotate the mode dial to the desired mode EAN we 2 Adjust settings Make the desired adjustments to flexible program mode P shutter speed modes and M aperture modes A and M exposure and flash compensation flash mode focus point metering AF and AF area modes viewfinder photography only bracketing and settings in the shooting M 202 and Custom Settings M 206 menus note that the camera will not store the options selected for Storage folder File naming Manage Picture Control Multiple exposure or Interval timer shooting 3 Select Save user settings MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus f amp SETUP MENU Highlight Save user settings in the setup Vn Reset user settings menu and Press gt L LCD brightness A Clean image sensor TE Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode 2 HDMI 4 Select U1 or U2 Highlight U1 or U2 and press P 75 5 Save user settings GS Save user setting e U1 Highlight Save settings and press to assign the settings selected in S
310. shutter speeds for long time Mew 35 s exposure exposures of moving lights the stars night FREE at aperture scenery or fireworks SSS 1 25 e Bulb zu amp The shutter remains open while the shutter release button is held down To prevent blur use a tripod or an optional MC DC2 remote cord M 281 e Time Requires an optional ML L3 remote control M 281 Start the exposure by pressing the ML L3 shutter release button The shutter remains open for thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time 1 Ready the camera Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable level surface To avoid loss of power during the exposure use a fully charged EN EL15 battery or an optional EH 5a AC adapter and EP 5B power connector Note that noise randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may occur in long exposures before shooting choose On for Long exp NR in the shooting menu M 205 Rotate the mode dial to M Mode dial Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of tusk For a shutter speed of time select remote mode M 80 after choosing the shutter speed Main command dial 73 4 Open the shutter Bulb After focusing press the shutter release button on the camera or optional MC DC2 remote cord all the way down Keep the shutter release button pressed until the exposure is complete Time Press the ML L3
311. slot icon in the top right corner of the Select folder by number dialog The card used for new folders depends on the option currently selected for Role played by card in slot 2 89 3 Save changes and exit Press to complete the operation and return to the shooting menu to exit without choosing a folder press the MENU button If a folder with the specified number does not already exist a new folder will be created Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is already full Folder and File Numbers If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered 9999 the shutter release will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken To continue shooting create a folder with a number less than 999 or select an existing folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images Startup Time Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card contains a very large number of files or folders 203 EE Selecting Folders from a List 1 Choose Select folder from list By Sorese tier Highlight Select folder from list and press P S 1000700 101D7000 102D7000 103D7000 2 Highlight a folder Press A or W to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press 8 to select the highlighted folder and return to the shooting menu to exit without changing the active folder press the MENU button Subsequent photographs will be stored in
312. t and lint from the filter with a blower Do not use a blower brush as the bristles could damage the filter Dirt that can not be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter Turn the camera off The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close Replace the lens or body cap 287 288 Use a Reliable Power Source The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged If the camera powers off while the mirror is raised the curtain will close automatically To prevent damage to the curtain observe the following precautions e Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source while the mirror is raised If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised a beep will sound and the self timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes End cleaning or inspection immediately M Foreign Matter on the Low Pass Filter Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from coming into contact with the low pass filter during production and shipping The D7000 however is designed to be used with interchangeable lenses and foreign matter may enter the camera when lenses are removed or exchanged Once inside the camera this foreign matter may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken u
313. t in flash is in mode M Commander Mode Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the monitor preflashes from the built in flash particular care is required if the camera is not mounted a tripod Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units AA mode as this may interfere with exposure To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built in flash from appearing in photographs taken at short range choose low ISO sensitivities or small apertures large f numbers or use an optional SG 3IR infrared panel for the built in flash An SG 3IR is required for best results with rear curtain sync which produces brighter timing flashes After positioning the remote flash units take a test shot and view the results in the camera monitor Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used the practical maximum is three With more than this number the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance e4 Modeling Flash MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected when the camera is being used with the built in PEMMA flash or an optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit a modeling flash will be emitted when the camera depth of field preview button is pressed M 72 No modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected 228
314. t used when the image was created My Menu amp Recent Settings My Menu is a customized menu that gives you quick access to up to 20 options selected from the playback shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus To display My Menu press MENU and select the My Menu tab MENU button gt MY MENU e Image quality z JPEG compression NEF RAW recording _ 3Assign Fn button Rank items EJ Choose tab m MMW e Image quality z JPEG compression NEF RAW recording f3 Assign Fn button Remove items Rank items EJ Choose tab Options can be added deleted and reordered as described below If desired recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu M 268 EE Adding Options to My Menu 1 Select Add items In My Menu highlight Add items and press gt 2 Select a menu Highlight the name of the menu containing the option you wish to add and press P 3 Select an item Highlight the desired menu item and press QW 4 Position the new item Press A or V to move the new item up or down in My Menu Press 68 to add the new item G MMW e Image quality NORM z JPEG compression ii NEF RAW recording f3 Assign Fn button S Add items Remove items Rank items CB Playback menu T os Custom setting menu Setup menu Ki Retouch menu gt Additems Q _ N Reset shooting menu Storage folder File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 v Image quality Ima
315. tA3ft9in a 56 8 16 2 32 06 30 2ft 9ft10n se 8 n 6 2 32 0621 t en s n a oers nAn n 22 32 0611 aaen 1 2 fs 0608 2h 2R7in The built in flash has a minimum range of 0 6 m 2 ft In mode P the maximum aperture minimum f number is limited according to ISO sensitivity as shown below Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of wo 20 o so woo 320 e 28 8 If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens 147 Flash Compensation P S A and M Modes Only Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from 3 EV to 1 EV in increments of 3EV changing the brightness of the main subject relative to the background Flash output can be increased to make the main subject appear brighter or reduced to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections Press the Ei4 button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel In general choose positive values to make the main subject brighter negative values to make it darker button Sub command dial At values other than 0 0 a icon will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the button The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by pressing the button T 1 Fao Baa Normal flash output can be restored by setting
316. teps 1 and 2 LAT Save setting to the mode dial position selected in Step 4 cancel Recalling User Settings Simply rotate the mode dial to U1 to recall the Mode dial settings assigned to U1 or to U2 to recall the settings assigned to U2 sj Resetting User Settings To reset settings for U1 or U2 to default values 1 Select Reset user settings MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus pe o SETUP MENU g e Format memory card Highlight Reset user settings in the setup E sns menu and press gt Y os i 4 Clean image sensor TE Lock mirror up for cleaning Video mode f HDMI Gea QUAL vo e A 2 Select U1 or U2 Highlight U1 or U2 and press gt 3 Reset user settings By Reset user settios Highlight Reset and press W f Reset E Cancel 76 Release Mode Choosing a Release Mode To choose a release mode press the release mode dial lock release and turn the release mode dial to the desired setting N Y FORMATE a Release mode dial Mode Description Single frame Camera takes one photograph each time shutter release button is pressed Continuous low speed While shutter release button is held down camera records 1 5 CL frames per second Frame rate can be chosen using Custom Setting d6 CL mode shooting speed M 217 C Continuous high speed While shutter release button is held down
317. the camera off Y Inserting and Removing Batteries Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing batteries 2 Open the battery chamber cover Unlatch and open the battery chamber cover 3 Insert the battery Insert the battery in the orientation shown using the battery to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side The latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully inserted 4 Close the battery chamber cover Removing the Battery Turn the camera off and open the battery chamber cover Press the battery latch in the direction shown by the arrow to release the battery and then remove the battery by hand 24 Attach a Lens Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera when the lens is removed The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is an AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR Focal length scale Mounting mark Focal length mark Lens hood 1 317 Lens cap ZA ARN Rear lens cap AA IEA i ZA D A M switch see below VR vibration reduction switch Q 26 Zoom ring Focus ring 55 99 1 Turn the camera off 2 Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap 3 Attach the lens Keeping the mounting mark on the lens aligned with the mounting mark on the camera body position the lens in the camera s bayonet mount Being careful not to press th
318. the dial to the right for large apertures low f numbers that blur background details or fast shutter speeds that freeze motion Main command dial Rotate the dial to the left for small apertures high f numbers that increase depth of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion All combinations produce the same exposure While flexible program is in effect a 3 indicator appears in the control panel To restore default shutter speed and aperture settings rotate the main command dial until the indicator is no longer displayed choose another mode or turn the camera off See Also See page 298 for information on the built in exposure program For information on activating the exposure meters see Auto Meter Off on page 39 68 Mode S Shutter Priority Auto In shutter priority auto you choose the shutter speed while the camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure Use slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving subjects fast shutter speeds to freeze motion a aw Fast shutter speed 1 1 600 5 Slow shutter speed 1 6 s To take photographs in shutter priority auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to S 2 Choose a shutter speed While the exposure meters are on rotate the main command dial to choose the desired shutter speed from x 25a or values between 30 s and s o00s Main command dial 3 Framea photograph foc
319. the order in which they will be taken GF iB Bracketing progress indicator Number of shots a Control panel Bracketing order Normal exposure underexposure overexposure No of shots 3 a Normal exposure overexposure pae So ma M p p m7 Normal exposure underexposure BKT will be displayed in the viewfinder see right the control panel will show Gai 109 3 Select the bracketing increment Pressing the BKT button rotate the sub command dial to choose from values between 0 3 EV and 2 EV iP Bracketing le increment BKT button Sub command dial Control panel See Also For information on choosing the size of the increment see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl N 211 For information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed see Custom Setting e6 Bracketing order T 229 4 Framea photograph focus and shoot The camera will vary exposure and or flash level shot by shot according to the bracketing program selected Modifications to exposure are added to those made with exposure compensation M 107 making it possible to achieve exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV While bracketing is in effect a bracketing progress indicator will be displayed in the control panel A segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot the E segment when the unmodified shot is taken the B segment wh
320. tings To display the Custom Settings menu press MENU and select the Custom Settings menu tab MENU button pe CUSTOM SETTING MENU gt CUSTOM SETTING MENU e Reset custom settings a a Autofocus a Autofocus b Metering exposure b Metering exposure gt C Timers AE lock C Timers AE lock A Shooting display A d Shooting display amp Bracketing flash e Bracketing flash f Controls f Controls 2 Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings Custom Setting groups to suit individual preferences a Autofocus 206 sal a AF S priority selection EE a3 Focus tracking with lock on AFs a4 AF point illumination AUTO a5Focus point wrap around OFF a6 Number of focus points AF39 a7 Built in AF assist illuminator ON a8 Live view movie AF a b Metering exposure 1 3 b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl 1 3 b3 Easy exposure compensation OFF b4 Center weighted area QF b5Fine tune optimal exposure amp o1Shutter release button AEL OFF Reset custom settings 74 c Timers AE lock Shutter release button AE L daa c Auto meter off delay Dis E b Metering exposure Ato met C Timers AE lock __ 4 Monitor off delay ls c5 Remote on duration in d Shooting display p 7 d2 Viewfinder grid display Bracket ng fl ash 431SO display and adjustment OFF d Shooting display f Controls Le d2 Viewfinder grid display OFF d31SO display and adjustment OFF d4 Viewfinde
321. tion is on 3 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority Selecting Optimal quality increases the file size of JPEG images number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly d7 Max Continuous Release M 217 The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 100 320 Battery Life The number of shots that can be taken with fully charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery temperature and how the camera is used In the case of AA batteries capacity also varies with make and storage conditions some batteries can not be used Sample figures for the camera and optional MB D11 multi power battery pack are given below e CIPA standard One EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 1050 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D11 Approximately 1050 shots Six AA batteries MB D11 Approximately 650 shots Two EN EL15 batteries one in camera and one in MB D11 Approximately 2100 shots e Nikon standard One EN EL15 battery camera Approximately 4500 shots One EN EL15 battery MB D11 Approximately 4500 shots Six AA batteries MB D11 Approximately 1700 shots Two EN EL15 batteries one in camera and one in MB D11 Approximately 9000 shots 1 Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S DX NIKKOR 18 105 mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR lens under the following test conditions lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one photograph take
322. tn snnensiersects 21 Gaps eleva ia ed oc lial E terre E E A NT ite Sere E nese rere er ae 21 ESA EEE gi S OEE meret net ere vere E A Wann none ant erie rare ote errr or eer 24 PAU GUN el SING rne E E same ere 25 BN o AP EEEE NA E E A A sansa E A E T 27 Inserta Memory Cal darnenn ne tatarn tetere eer mterrrrre tc Mmennrnre etree 29 Format the Memory Card csssssssssecsssssscessscsssssscsssecsssssscessecsssecsssssecsssscsssessesesecassecseseess 32 Adjust Viewfinder FOCUS cssesssssssssssecsssscsessssessssecsssscsessssecsesscsesassucsssscsessssucseeasscasencsesess 34 Basic Photography and Playback 35 Point and Shoot Photography amp ANd MOdeS c cscsssssesssessesssesssessesssesseesseessen 35 Step 1 TULA the Camera OPsnoacuroioruroina ann 35 Step 2 Select or MOE sssssssssssssssssesssesessseeeecectceeterseersrsesssssssssssssssssususseseseeeereerrrerere 36 Step 3 Frame the Photograph csssssssssecsssssscsssssscsssecsssssscsssecsssesscsesecsesesseseseeseseeeenees 37 PA FOU ec ne er eee eee 38 ESI VOLO oa E EEA 38 Creative Photography Scene Modes sssssssscsssssesesssecscsssescsssssscacsessssssssesseasseesesees SH POM MAN acs tucascescecctsccascttate acecceceetaa tae emacs teeta antec acess os laces Sy OI cece ceases cere etavscnsd E E E enna aac NS NN o EEEN A A ANA E A A EAO N Nigt Porral t scccsscacecenttcestecneestevactacatesanclescattiaersseesieatuantensaneaientnatenaiaresemeiee Mont
323. to delete all frames before Choose start point or after Choose end point the current frame 6 Save the copy Highlight Yes and press to save the edited copy If necessary the copy can be trimmed as described above to remove additional footage Edited copies are indicated bya icon in full frame playback m Trimming Movies Movies must be at least two seconds long If a copy can not be created at the current playback position the current position will be displayed in red in Step 5 and no copy will be created The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card To prevent the camera from turning off unexpectedly use a fully charged battery when editing movies The Retouch Menu Movies can also be edited using the Edit movie option m RETOUCH MENU in the retouch menu M 248 Straighten z Distortion control Fisheye Color outline A Color sketch Ly Perspective control Miniature effect aseda 65 Saving Selected Frames To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still 1 View the movie and choose a frame Play the movie back as described on page 62 Pause the movie at the frame you intend to copy k HE 01m30s 10m30s Ps NS A AAN ZZ j A c 2 Display the retouch menu is Press on to display the retouch menu Yom button Edit movie WE Choose start point J Choose end point R Save selected frame Can
324. tremely cold locations Repeat this process at least once every six months e The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in use Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance and the battery may not charge or charge only partially Wait for the battery to cool before charging e Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair battery performance e A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new EN EL15 battery 290 e Charge the battery before use When taking photographs on important occasions ready a spare EN EL15 battery and keep it fully charged Depending on your location it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries on short notice Note that on cold days the capacity of batteries tends to decrease Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather Keep a spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary Once warmed a cold battery may recover some of its charge e Used batteries are a valuable resource recycle in accord with local regulations 291 292 Available Settings The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each mode 6 9 A m ao X ati wi 7 7 vvv v Vv v vvv v 7 7 eWhiteblane v v a aaa Set Pi
325. trol mode From a distance of 5 m 16 ft or less aim the transmitter on the ML L3 at either of the infrared receivers on the camera M 3 5 and press the ML L3 shutter release button In delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for about two seconds before the shutter is released In quick response remote mode the self timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released n remote mirror up mode pressing the ML L3 shutter release button once raises the mirror the shutter will be released and the self timer lamp will flash after 30 s or when the button is pressed a second time To cancel shooting select another release mode 81 82 M Before Using the Remote Control Before using the remote control for the first time remove the clear plastic battery insulator sheet Using the Built in Flash Before taking a photograph with the flash in P S A M or t1 modes press the button to raise the flash and wait for the indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder M 143 Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised while remote control mode is in effect or after the self timer has started If the flash is required the camera will only respond to the ML L3 shutter release button once the flash has charged In auto or scene modes in which the flash pops up automatically the flash will begin charging when remote mode is selected once the flash is charged it will automatically pop up and fire when req
326. trols Accessory terminal accessories e DK 20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses Lenses are available with diopters of 5 4 3 2 0 0 5 1 2 and 3 m when the camera diopter adjustment control is in the neutral position 1 m t Use eyepiece correction lenses only if the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m Test eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be achieved The rubber eyecup can not be used with eyepiece correction lenses e Magnifying Eyepiece DK 21M The DK 21M magnifies the view through the viewfinder by approximately 1 17 x 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m t for greater precision when framing e Magnifier DG 2 The DG 2 magnifies the scene displayed in the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during focusing Eyepiece adapter required available separately e Eyepiece Adapter DK 22 The DK 22 is used when attaching the DG 2 magnifier e Right Angle Viewing Attachment DR 6 The DR 6 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to the lens for example from directly above when the camera is horizontal e Capture NX 2 A complete photo editing package offering such features as white balance adjustment and color control points e Camera Control Pro 2 Control the camera remotely from a computer to record movies and photographs and save
327. ttings gt Microphone The brightness of the image in the monitor differs from the exposure of photographs taken in live view e Center weighted or spot metering is selected M 105 e The camera is in mode M e The subject is too bright or too dark e Active D Lighting is in effect M 139 e The photograph is a long time exposure 73 e The flash is used M 143 Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording Choose an option for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power supply 237 Bright bands appear during live view or movie recording A flash or other light source with brief duration was used during live view or movie recording Menu item can not be selected Some options are not available in all modes 301 302 Shooting P S A M Shutter release disabled e Non CPU lens is attached rotate camera mode dial to A or M CQ 270 e Mode dial rotated to after shutter speed of tis amp selected in mode M choose new shutter speed M 69 Camera is slow to respond to shutter release button Select Off for Custom Setting d11 Exposure delay mode M 219 Full range of shutter speeds not available e Flashin use Flash sync speed can be selected using Custom Setting e1 Flash sync speed when using optional SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 or SB R200 flash unit choose 1 320 s Auto FP or 1 250 s Auto FP for full range of shutter speeds M 222 e When On is
328. tton gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Auto AUTO the color of the lettering in the information display M 10 will automatically change from black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the background To always use the same color lettering select Manual and choose Dark on light B black lettering or Light on dark W white lettering Monitor brightness will automatically be adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color TES SONA QS 31 a0 Pv OF OF ES amp amp Es Dark on light Light on dark d10 LCD Illumination MENU button gt Custom Settings menu At the default setting of Off the control panel backlight LCD Pemommm illuminator will only light while the power switch is rotated toward 8 If Onis selected the control panel will be illuminated whenever the exposure meters are active M 39 Select Off for increased battery life d11 Exposure Delay Mode MENU button gt Custom Settings menu In situations where the slightest camera movement can blur GS At Exnosure delay mode pictures select On to delay shutter release until about 1 safter the shutter release button is pressed and the mirror is raised d12 Flash Warning MENU button gt Custom Settings menu If On is selected the flash ready indicator 4 will blink in the viewfinder if the flash is required to ensure optimal exposure 219 220 d13 MB D11 Battery Type MENU
329. ucing photographs with exposure close to what is seen in the monitor In P S A and M modes exposure can be adjusted by 5 EV 107 Note that the effects of values over 3 EV or under 3 EV can not be previewed in the monitor 53 54 HDMI When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device the camera monitor will turn off and the video device will display the view through the lens as shown at right If the device supports HDMI CEC select Off for the HDMI gt Device control option in the setup menu M 194 before shooting in live view V Shooting in Live View Mode To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure remove the rubber eyecup and cover the viewfinder with the supplied DK 5 eyepiece cap before shooting M 81 Although they will not appear in the final picture flicker banding or distortion may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed through frame Bright light sources may leave after images in the monitor when the camera is panned When shooting in live view mode avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Live view ends automatically if the lens is removed Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits exit live v
330. ues more purple s uawiysnipe jenuew Filter Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome photographs Choose effects from Off yellow orange red and green M 135 Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from B amp W black and Toning white Sepia Cyanotype blue tinted monochrome Red Yellow Green Kjuo awWosYyOUOW AjUO woiypouow uou s uawjsnipe jenuew Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Red Purple M 135 V A Auto Results for auto sharpening contrast and saturation vary with exposure and the position of the subject in the frame Use a type G or D lens for best results Custom Picture Controls The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those on which the custom Picture Control was based 134 The Picture Control Grid Pressing the 9 button in Step 2 M 133 displays a Picture Control grid showing the contrast and saturation for the selected Picture Control in relation to the other Picture Controls only contrast is displayed when Monochrome is selected Release the amp button to return to the Picture Control menu The icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast and saturation are displayed in green in the Picture Control grid and lines appear parallel to the axes of the grid Previous Settings The line under the value display in the Picture Control setting menu indicates the previous value for the setting Use this as a reference when adjusting sett
331. uired Note that only one photograph will be taken when the flash fires regardless of the number of exposures selected for Custom Setting c3 Self timer N 214 In flash modes that support red eye reduction the red eye reduction lamp will light for about one second before the shutter is released In delayed remote mode the self timer lamp will light for two seconds followed by the red eye reduction lamp which light for one second before the shutter is released Focusing in Remote Control Mode The camera will not adjust focus in remote mirror up mode or when continuous servo autofocus is selected note however that if any autofocus mode is selected you can focus by pressing the camera shutter release button halfway before shooting pressing the button all the way down will not release the shutter If auto or single servo autofocus is selected or the camera is in live view in delayed or quick response remote mode the camera will automatically adjust focus before shooting if the camera is unable to focus in viewfinder photography it will return to stand by without releasing the shutter Remote Mirror up Mode Metering is not performed in remote mirror up mode Photos can not be framed in the viewfinder while the mirror is raised Bah Dal Da Pal In self timer mode a shutter speed of ti i is equivalent to approximately 1 4 s See Also For information on choosing the duration of the self timer the number of shots taken and the int
332. umber of shots PENGIN p 7 a Number of shots taken each time the shutter release button is pressed e Interval between shots Choose the interval between shots when RESIt i lt Interval between shot the Number of shots is more than 1 x nterval between shots c4 Monitor off Delay MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the monitor remains on when no operations PBEMMEEN are performed during playback Playback defaults to 10 s and Ma Playback Dils gt image review Image review defaults to 4 s when menus HMs on 1 F e ee information display 10s Menus defaults to 20 s or information Information display PREISS ds Live view lin defaults to 10 s are displayed or during live view and movie recording Live view defaults to 10 minutes Choose a shorter monitor off delay for longer battery life c5 Remote on Duration MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose how long the camera will remain on stand by in remote RRSMimerrMerm release mode M 80 If no operations are performed for the selected period remote shooting will end and the exposure f meters will turn off Choose shorter times for longer battery life Sead To reactivate remote mode after the timer has expired press the camera shutter release button halfway d Shooting Display d1 Beep MENU button gt Custom Settings menu Choose the pitch and volume of the beep that sounds when the camera focuses using single serv
333. ures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with center weighted or spot metering M 105 Choose from values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure in increments of 3 EV In general positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker 1 EV No exposure compensation 1 EV To choose a value for exposure compensation press the G4 button and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is displayed in the control panel or viewfinder Main command dial 0 EV 4 button pressed At values other than 0 0 the 0 at the center of the exposure rz 5 indicators will flash modes P and A only and a 4 icon will be a displayed in the control panel and viewfinder after you release the 4 button The current value for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the exposure indicator by pressing the 4 button Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off 107 108 Mode M In mode M exposure compensation affects only the exposure indicator shutter speed and aperture do not change Using a Flash When a flash is used exposure compensation affects both background exposure and flash level See Also For information on choosing the size of the increments available for exposure compensation see Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl Q 211 For info
334. ures is 30 s longer than the option selected for Custom Setting c4 If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off during playback or menu operations shooting will end and a multiple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point 1 Select Multiple exposure MENU button Press the MENU button to display the menus Highlight Multiple exposure in the shooting menu and press P a SHOOTING MENU Active D Lighting OFF 7 Long exp NR OFF High ISO NR NORM ISO sensitivity settings OFF TE Movie settings Interval timer shooting OFF EJ Remote control mode G2s_ 2 Choose the number of shots E Multiple exposure Highlight Number of shots and press P Y Done Number of shots Auto gain 2 The dialog shown at right will be displayed E Multiple exposure Press A or W to choose the number of o a exposures that will be combined to form a 4 single photograph and press 6 R 2 3 3 Choose the amount of gain E Multiple exposure a Highlight Auto gain and press P Y Done es Number of shots Fa Auto gain The following options will be displayed E Multiple exposure Highlight an option and press oe e On Gain is adjusted according to number of exposures actually recorded gain for each exposure is set to 1 2 for 2 exposures 1 3 for 3 exposures etc e Off Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure Recommended if backgroun
335. us and shoot See Also See page 306 for information on what to do if flashing kis ta or indicator appears in the shutter speed displays 69 Mode A Aperture Priority Auto In aperture priority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure Large apertures low f numbers reduce depth of field blurring objects behind and in front of the main subject Small apertures high f numbers increase depth of field bringing out details in the background and foreground Short field depths are generally used in portraits to blur background details long field depths in landscape photographs to bring the foreground and background into focus hej A a Pi Large aperture f 2 8 To take photographs in aperture priority auto 1 Rotate the mode dial to A Mode dial 2 Choose an aperture a While the exposure meters are on rotate the sub command dial to choose the desired aperture from values between the minimum and maximum for the lens Sub command dial 3 Framea photograph focus and shoot Non CPU Lenses M 270 Use the lens aperture ring to adjust aperture If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non CPU lens data item in setup menu M 159 when a non CPU lens is attached the current f number will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel rounded to the nearest full
336. us picture will be displayed Display previous picture If deleted picture was first frame following picture will be displayed If user was scrolling through pictures in order recorded following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If user was scrolling through pictures in reverse order previous picture will be displayed as described for Show previous Show next Show previous Continue as before Rotate Tall MENU button gt playback menu Choose whether to rotate tall portrait orientation pictures Fama for display during playback Note that because the camera itself p is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting images are not rotated automatically during image review Option Description Tall portrait orientation pictures are automatically rotated for display in the On camera monitor Pictures taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation M 239 will be displayed in wide landscape orientation Off Tall portrait orientation pictures are displayed in wide landscape orientation 200 Slide Show MENU button gt gt playback menu Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder M 195 Hidden images M 196 are not displayed Option Description Start Start slide show Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed To start the slide show highlight Start and press 68 The following operations can be perform
337. ustom Setting f4 Assign preview button M 232 2 Use the selected control to choose the lens number Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel Focal length Maximum aperture Lens number Fn button Main command dial Control panel 161 The GP 1 GPS Unit The GP 1 GPS unit available separately can be connected to the camera s accessory terminal M 281 using the cable supplied with the GP 1 allowing information on the camera s current position to be recorded when photographs are taken Turn the camera off before connecting the GP 1 for more information see the GP 1 manual EE Setup Menu Options The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below e Auto meter off Choose whether the exposure meters turn off automatically when the GP 1 is attached Option Description Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations are performed for the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter off delay T 214 to allow the Enable camera time to acquire GPS data the delay is extended by up to one minute after the exposure meters are activated or the camera is turned on This reduces the drain on the battery Disable Exposure meters do not turn off while the GP 1 is connected e Position This item is only available if the GP 1 is connected E Position when it displays the current latitude longitude altitude and PAEI
338. va coceses cua aweeca aie sat aiueeannenv etna 242 COPY HOME IMTOFMMATIOMN essevtercscscsstasasnzevesnseasseoseesstousbussninacsscdtcesandeesiavstsesoesubivhvoscaseeuetinds 243 Save Load SCCUIIGS vax0 tees tae eee Saeco caval EEA E ie E 244 Virta FIOMIZOMS ays csicvussessrncctaswies wine A a 245 AFFINE TUNG iee eee ee eee e ene erro ee ee 246 EVC F OG si E wos a ataes nena eah amen neeeanane 247 PIPPI Wall OV GUS OM tert ae eden a teicher svete lead Ava eae oi leer ana eas 247 K The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies s ssssssssessessessesssssesssssssssssesssssssssessessesees 248 Creating Retouched COPieS csssssesssecsssssscsssecsssssscsssecsssssscssssesssecessesscseseesssecsssessesees 249 PDE TCUNUMNG ssn A aera tousaneseastermetanteniesee 251 Red Eye COM EGEIOM cis ere nan R AA RETARO O 251 UMN ii seh E A S A a Aa lee yA 252 IVIGHOGIFONN Gs cisarsecesatecs Catsncetsemtorchthameratineten nn eeresanamanuaanantamuancuianes 253 FNRI EMS CUS meann cpcaces ovoespusats uacussssuusettansicosovstetoe estoy oad eee reed ees 254 Color Balan Een a T RI A S 255 MIJE OVET V eane rA 256 NEF RAW Processing tcc acer eon a a A rete 258 KOSZON a cD esata Deen sete eect 259 QUICK RET OUIGIA cscscscsaavecsasastcsvateacbannranssivnesexernca eat sonwvoadbncesonstnasteaalrastaenseasanananseradenteeaneents 260 SEN AICI SIA sa cae stdacss access cosetaneesaceces sataeee tees ens tosh ets acannon dete enna botsees detate asco eo eavate tate 261 EDISTO T
339. y card If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken bracketing will resume from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on 115 116 White Balance P S A and M Modes Only White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of the light source Auto white balance is recommended for most light sources in P S A and M modes other values can be selected if necessary according to the type of source Option Description AUTO Auto White balance is adjusted automatically For best 3 500 ne results use type G or D lens If built in or optional Keep warm lighting colors ee flash fires results are adjusted for flash Incandescent 3 000 K Use under incandescent lighting om Fluorescent Use with e Sodium vapor lighting found in sports venues e Warm white fluorescent lights e White fluorescent lights e Cool white fluorescent lights e Daylight white fluorescent lights e Daylight fluorescent lights High temp mercury vapor 7 200 K e High color temperature light sources e g mercury vapor lamps Direct sunlight 5 200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight 4 Flash 5 400 K_ Use with built in or optional flash Cloudy 6 000 K_ Use in daylight under overcast skies amp Shade 8 000 K Use in daylight with subjects in the shade 2 500 Choose color temperature from list of values Choose color temp 10 000 K 122 ject ligh rce
340. y step value b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl c2 Auto meter off delay d2 Viewfinder grid display d6 CL mode shooting speed d7 Max continuous release d8 File number sequence d9 Information display c3 Self timer c5 Remote on duration c4 Monitor off delay d1 Beep ee e em eal C1 Shutter ustom Settings 293 6 9 A Hi a MM aa OW elFlashsyncspeed WW OWI YW VY WV WW e2 Flash shutterspeed WW e3 Flash cntrlfor built inflash W v e4 Modelingflash SS W v e5 Auto bracketingset SS Ww i p e6 Bracketing order v y A 7 f2 OK button shootingmode V V v v v v v v v A 7 fi 7 15 Assign AEL AFL button V Wi v v v v v v v 7 7 7 7 7 1 Reset with Reset shooting menu M 202 2 Reset with two button reset M 151 3 Fixed at Auto 4 Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting 5 Reset with Reset custom settings CZ 207 294 Defaults The default settings for the options in the camera menus are listed below For information on two button resets see page 151 EE Playback Menu Defaults Option Playback folder D7000 Image review Off After delete Show next EE Shooting Menu Defaults Option aa File naming DSC 204 Role played by card in Slot 2 Overflow 89 Image quality 85 Image size 88 JPEG compression Size priority 87 NEF RAW recording compressed 87 NEF RAW bit dept

Nikon D7000 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents